Instruction MI 020-495

November 2002

Intelligent Field Device Configurator (IFDC)

For use with I/A Series® Systems
and
PC20 for use with Windows® Based PCs
MI 020-495 – November 2002
Contents
Figures................................................................................................................................. xiii

Tables................................................................................................................................... xix

Preface.................................................................................................................................. xxi

1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1
Field Devices Supported ....................................................................................................... 2
IFDC ................................................................................................................................... 3
PC20 .................................................................................................................................... 5
Standard Equipment with FoxCom Modem ................................................................... 5
Standard Equipment with HART Modem ...................................................................... 6
Optional Equipment ....................................................................................................... 6
Field Device Restrictions ...................................................................................................... 6
IFDC .............................................................................................................................. 6
PC20 ............................................................................................................................... 7
Software Version 2.0 Enhancements ..................................................................................... 7
Software Version 2.2 Enhancements ..................................................................................... 8
Software Version 2.3 Enhancements ..................................................................................... 9
Reference Documents ............................................................................................................... 9

2. Installation ...................................................................................................................... 13
PC20 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................... 13
Attaching the Modem to the Serial Port ............................................................................. 13
Connecting the Modem to a Field Device .......................................................................... 14
Connecting a Printer .......................................................................................................... 16
Hardware Installation for Profibus Device .......................................................................... 16
PC20 Software Installation ...................................................................................................... 17
Software Installation for Profibus Cards ............................................................................. 17
IFDC Software Installation ..................................................................................................... 17
PC20 Instruction Book CD-ROM Installation ....................................................................... 18

3. Operation ........................................................................................................................ 19
Running the PC20 Program .................................................................................................... 19
Running the IFDC Program ................................................................................................... 20
General Information ............................................................................................................... 20
Database Files ......................................................................................................................... 20
File Management ................................................................................................................ 21
File Location for PC20 ....................................................................................................... 21
Database File Compatibility ............................................................................................... 21

iii
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Contents

PC20 to PC20 ............................................................................................................... 21

PC20 to IFDC .............................................................................................................. 22
IFDC to PC20 ............................................................................................................. 22
ABO991 to PC20/IFDC ............................................................................................... 23
PC10 to PC20 ............................................................................................................... 23
HART Model 275 Hand Held Configurator to PC20/IFDC ........................................ 23
HHT to PC20 ............................................................................................................... 23
PC20 to PC10/ABO991 ............................................................................................... 24
Import/Export PC20 Database Files to Popular Database Software Programs ............... 24
Device Output Protection ....................................................................................................... 24
Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 24
Status Bar ................................................................................................................................ 25
Info Window .......................................................................................................................... 26
Device Characteristic Tab .................................................................................................. 26
Audit Trail Tab .................................................................................................................. 27
Example for Microsoft Excel .......................................................................................... 27
Example for Microsoft Access ........................................................................................ 28
Error Trace Tab ................................................................................................................. 28
Top Level Menu Screen ......................................................................................................... 29
Settings .............................................................................................................................. 30
Directories ..................................................................................................................... 31
IFD Modem Setup ........................................................................................................ 31
Password/Security Options ............................................................................................ 31
Startup Options ............................................................................................................. 33
Initial Settings using the INI File ....................................................................................... 34
Beginning a New Configuration Database .............................................................................. 37
Device Selection and File Operations ...................................................................................... 38
IFDC Operation on Solaris with “windows off” ...................................................................... 41
Preconfiguring a Device .......................................................................................................... 41
Connecting to a Device ........................................................................................................... 42
Device Top Level Menu Screen ............................................................................................... 42
Workshop Environment ..................................................................................................... 46
Trend Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 46
Save Trend Data ............................................................................................................ 46
Load Trend Data ........................................................................................................... 46
Clear Trend Data .......................................................................................................... 46
Print Trend Data ........................................................................................................... 47
Monitor Trend Data ..................................................................................................... 47
Export Trend Data ........................................................................................................ 47
Save as Default ................................................................................................................... 48
Reading Device Data .......................................................................................................... 48
Downloading Database Information to a Device ................................................................ 48
ASCII Format for Import and Export ................................................................................. 49
File Header .................................................................................................................... 49
Parameter List ............................................................................................................... 49
Comments ..................................................................................................................... 49
IFDC/PC20 Export - Format ............................................................................................. 49

iv
Contents MI 020-495 – November 2002

IFDC/PC20 Import - Format ............................................................................................ 50

Example of the IFDC/PC20 - ASCII Format ..................................................................... 50
Configuration Function ..................................................................................................... 50
Compare Function ............................................................................................................. 51
Comments Function .......................................................................................................... 52
Calibration Function .......................................................................................................... 52
Field Device Status Function .............................................................................................. 52
Set Update Time Function ................................................................................................. 54
Set mA/Pulse Output Function (Loop Cal) ........................................................................ 54
Set Digital Output Function .............................................................................................. 55
Display Raw Input Function .............................................................................................. 55
Go On-Line Function ........................................................................................................ 56
Go Off-Line Function ........................................................................................................ 56
Help Function .................................................................................................................... 56
Help Menu .................................................................................................................... 56
Help Via the Toolbar .................................................................................................... 56
Help Via the F1 Function Key ...................................................................................... 57
Previewing or Printing a Device Database Report ............................................................... 57
IFDC Printing on Station with Solaris Operating System .................................................. 58
Print Setup .................................................................................................................... 58
Print Font ...................................................................................................................... 59
Print Preview ................................................................................................................. 59
IFDC Printing on Station with Windows Operating System .............................................. 59
Profibus Configuration (PC20 only) ....................................................................................... 60
Profibus Master Page .......................................................................................................... 61
Profibus Slave Page ............................................................................................................. 63

4. Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................. 65
IFDC/PC20 Error Messages ................................................................................................... 65
Device Status Error Messages .................................................................................................. 65
Device Diagnostic Error Messages ........................................................................................... 66
PC20 Trace Function .............................................................................................................. 66
IFDC Trace Function ............................................................................................................. 66
PC20 Fault Analysis of Communication Failures .................................................................... 68
FoxCom Protocol ............................................................................................................... 68
HART Protocol .................................................................................................................. 69

Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters ............................................... 71

Device Data Screen ................................................................................................................. 71
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................ 72
Status Error Messages ......................................................................................................... 72
Diagnostic Error Messages .................................................................................................. 72
Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 74
ReZero ............................................................................................................................... 75
Point Calibration ................................................................................................................ 76
ReRange ............................................................................................................................. 77
FoxCom Device ............................................................................................................. 77

v
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Contents

HART Device ............................................................................................................... 78

Restore Default .................................................................................................................. 79
mA Calibration .................................................................................................................. 79
Procedure for a FoxCom Device .................................................................................... 80
Procedure for a HART Device ....................................................................................... 81
Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 82
Identifier Tab Screen .......................................................................................................... 82
FoxCom Device ............................................................................................................. 82
Hart Device ................................................................................................................... 83
Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen .............................................................. 84
FoxCom Device ............................................................................................................. 84
HART Device ............................................................................................................... 85
Database Report ...................................................................................................................... 86

Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters .................................................................. 89

Device Data Screen ................................................................................................................. 89
Error Messages ....................................................................................................................... 90
Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 90
ReZero ............................................................................................................................... 91
N-Point Calibration ........................................................................................................... 91
ReRange ............................................................................................................................. 92
Custom Input Curve .......................................................................................................... 93
Enable Custom Curve ........................................................................................................ 94
Restore Factory Calibration ................................................................................................ 95
Restore Factory mA ............................................................................................................ 95
mA Calibration .................................................................................................................. 96
Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 97
Identifier Tab Screen .......................................................................................................... 97
Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen .................................................................................... 98
Database Report ...................................................................................................................... 99

Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters....................................................... 101

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 101
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 102
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 103
N-Point Calibration ......................................................................................................... 104
1-Point Calibration ..................................................................................................... 104
2-Point Calibration ..................................................................................................... 104
3- and 5- Point Calibration ......................................................................................... 104
N-Point Calibration Procedure .................................................................................... 104
Custom Input Curve ........................................................................................................ 105
ReRange ........................................................................................................................... 107
Restore Factory mA .......................................................................................................... 108
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 108
Procedure for a FoxCom Device .................................................................................. 108
Procedure for a HART Device ..................................................................................... 109
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 111

vi
Contents MI 020-495 – November 2002

Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 111

FoxCom Device ........................................................................................................... 111
HART Device ............................................................................................................. 112
Input Tab Screen .............................................................................................................. 113
Options Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 114
FoxCom Device ........................................................................................................... 114
HART Device ............................................................................................................. 115
Display Tab Screen .......................................................................................................... 116
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 117

Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters ............................................... 119

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 119
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 120
Status Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 120
Diagnostic Error Messages ................................................................................................ 120
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 121
ReRange ........................................................................................................................... 122
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 122
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 124
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 124
Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen ......................................................................... 125
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 126

Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters ............................................................. 129

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 129
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 130
FoxCom Device ............................................................................................................... 130
HART Device .................................................................................................................. 132
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 134
Empty Pipe ...................................................................................................................... 134
mA Output ...................................................................................................................... 134
FoxCom Device ........................................................................................................... 135
HART Device ............................................................................................................. 135
Reset Totals ...................................................................................................................... 136
Pulse Preset ........................................................................................................................... 137
Reset Change Flag ................................................................................................................. 137
Master Reset .......................................................................................................................... 137
Acknowledge Alarms ............................................................................................................. 137
Acknowledge Prior Diagnostic .............................................................................................. 138
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 138
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 138
Flow Tab Screen ............................................................................................................... 139
Alarms Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 140
Contacts Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 141
Options Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 143

vii
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Contents

Display/Totalizer Tab Screen ........................................................................................... 144

Database Report .................................................................................................................... 145

Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters ............................................................................... 147

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 147
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 148
Status Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 148
Diagnostic Error Messages ................................................................................................ 149
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 150
ReZero Transmitter .......................................................................................................... 150
Startup Zero ..................................................................................................................... 151
Zero Total ........................................................................................................................ 152
Restore Factory mA .......................................................................................................... 152
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 152
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 154
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 154
Units Tab Screen .............................................................................................................. 155
Pulse Output Tab Screen ................................................................................................. 156
mA Mode Tab Screen ...................................................................................................... 157
Alarms Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 158
Solids Configuration Tab Screen ...................................................................................... 159
Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen ...................................................................................... 160
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 161

Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters.............................................................................. 163

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 163
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 164
Status Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 164
Diagnostic Error Messages ................................................................................................ 165
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 167
ReZero Transmitter .......................................................................................................... 167
Startup Zero ..................................................................................................................... 168
Zero Total ........................................................................................................................ 168
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 169
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 169
Units Tab Screen .............................................................................................................. 170
Outputs Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 171
Current Tab Screen .......................................................................................................... 172
Solids Tab Screen ............................................................................................................. 173
Flowtube Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 174
Modbus Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 175
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 176

Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters ......................................................................... 179

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 179
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 180

viii
Contents MI 020-495 – November 2002

Status Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 180

Diagnostic Error Messages ................................................................................................ 181
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 182
ReRange ........................................................................................................................... 182
Zero Total ........................................................................................................................ 183
Set Low Flow Cut-In ........................................................................................................ 183
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 184
FoxCom Device ........................................................................................................... 184
HART Device ............................................................................................................. 185
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 186
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 186
Flow Parameters Tab Screen ............................................................................................. 188
Options and Piping Tab Screen ........................................................................................ 189
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 191

Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters ................................................................................... 193

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 193
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 194
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 196
Bench Calibration ............................................................................................................ 196
Solution 1-Point Offset .................................................................................................... 197
Solution 1-Point Span ...................................................................................................... 198
Solution 2-Point ............................................................................................................... 199
Temperature Sensor Calibration ....................................................................................... 200
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 200
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 202
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 202
Sensor Tab Screen ............................................................................................................ 203
Measurement Tab Screen ................................................................................................. 204
Misc Tab Screen ............................................................................................................... 205
Application Tab Screen .................................................................................................... 206
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 207

Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters ............................................................ 213

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 213
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 214
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 216
1-Point Manual Calibration ............................................................................................. 216
2-Point Manual Calibration ............................................................................................. 217
Automatic Calibration ...................................................................................................... 218
Temperature Sensor ......................................................................................................... 218
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 219
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 220
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 220
Sensor Tab Screen ............................................................................................................ 221
Output Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 224
Measurement Tab Screen ................................................................................................. 225

ix
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Contents

Diagnostic Tab Screen ...................................................................................................... 226

Database Report .................................................................................................................... 227

Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth).............................. 231

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 231
Additional Profibus Data Screen ........................................................................................... 232
Status Error Messages ............................................................................................................ 233
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 235
Autostart Calibration ........................................................................................................ 235
Endpoints Calibration ...................................................................................................... 236
Analog Setpoint Calibration ............................................................................................. 236
Angle Calibration ............................................................................................................. 237
Temperature Calibration .................................................................................................. 237
Position Feedback Calibration .......................................................................................... 238
Air Supply Pressure Calibration ........................................................................................ 238
Output Pressure Calibration ............................................................................................. 238
Restore Valve-Specific Parameter ...................................................................................... 239
Restore Factory Settings ................................................................................................... 239
Test ....................................................................................................................................... 239
Go On-Line ..................................................................................................................... 239
Go Off-Line ..................................................................................................................... 239
Go Local .......................................................................................................................... 240
Set Setpoint ...................................................................................................................... 240
Reset Status ...................................................................................................................... 240
Reset Counters ................................................................................................................. 240
Reboot Device .................................................................................................................. 240
Write Protect .................................................................................................................... 240
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 241
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 241
Parameters Tab Screen ..................................................................................................... 242
Configuration Tab Screen ................................................................................................ 243
Characterization Tab Screen ............................................................................................. 244
Travel Tab Screen ............................................................................................................ 245
Alarms Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 246
Tuning Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 247
Pressure Tab Screen .......................................................................................................... 248
Options Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 249
Bin In Tab Screen ............................................................................................................ 250
Bin Out Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 251
Profibus Function Block Tab Screen ................................................................................ 252
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 253

Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters ............................................ 257

140 Series with FoxCom Protocol and with I/A Series
Intelligent Pressure Transmitter Compatibility ...................................................................... 257
How to Change the 140 Series Compatibility Type ......................................................... 259
140 Series with FoxCom or HART Protocol ......................................................................... 262

x
Contents MI 020-495 – November 2002

Device Data Screen .......................................................................................................... 262

Device Status Screen ......................................................................................................... 263
Diagnostic Codes ............................................................................................................. 265
Raw Input Value .............................................................................................................. 266
Return from Fail-Safe State .............................................................................................. 266
Reset Change Flag ............................................................................................................ 266
Master Reset ..................................................................................................................... 266
Write Protect .................................................................................................................... 266
Configuration ................................................................................................................... 266
Identifier Tab Screen ................................................................................................... 267
Input Tab Screen / Profibus PV Tab Screen ................................................................ 268
Characterization Tab Screen ........................................................................................ 270
Output Tab Screen ...................................................................................................... 271
Profibus Out Tab Screen ............................................................................................. 273
Density Tab Screen ..................................................................................................... 274
Failsafe Handling Tab Screen ...................................................................................... 274
Device Tab Screen ....................................................................................................... 276
Profibus Alarms Tab Screen ............................................................................................. 277
Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 278
ReZero ........................................................................................................................ 278
Point Calibration ......................................................................................................... 279
mA Calibration ............................................................................................................ 281
Restore Factory Calibration ......................................................................................... 281
Specification ..................................................................................................................... 282
Sensor Tab Screen ....................................................................................................... 282
Displacer Tab Screen ................................................................................................... 283

Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters.......................................... 285

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 285
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 286
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 287
Bench Calibration ............................................................................................................ 288
Calibration Pure H2O ..................................................................................................... 288
Solution 1-Point Offset .................................................................................................... 289
Solution 1-Point Span ...................................................................................................... 290
Solution 2-Point ............................................................................................................... 291
Temperature Sensor ......................................................................................................... 292
mA Calibration ................................................................................................................ 292
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 294
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 294
Sensor Tab Screen ............................................................................................................ 295
Measurement Tab Screen ................................................................................................. 296
Misc Tab Screen ............................................................................................................... 297
Application Tab Screen .................................................................................................... 298
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 299

Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices........................................................................ 305

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 305

xi
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Contents

Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 306

Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 306
Input Tab Screen .............................................................................................................. 307
Output Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 308
HART Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 309
Commands Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 310
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 311
Test ....................................................................................................................................... 311

Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters ............................................................ 313

Device Data Screen ............................................................................................................... 313
Error Messages ...................................................................................................................... 314
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 315
mA Output ...................................................................................................................... 316
Reset Totals ...................................................................................................................... 317
Zero Flow ......................................................................................................................... 317
Restore Zero Flow Default ............................................................................................... 318
Pulse Preset ........................................................................................................................... 318
Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 319
Identifier Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 319
Flow Tab Screen ............................................................................................................... 320
Alarms Tab Screen ........................................................................................................... 321
Contacts Tab Screen ........................................................................................................ 322
Options Tab Screen ......................................................................................................... 323
Display/Totalizer Tab Screen ........................................................................................... 324
Database Report .................................................................................................................... 325

Index .................................................................................................................................. 327

xii
Figures
1 Relationships Among Processors and Field Devices ...................................................... 4
1 Analog FoxCom or HART Device with Remote Power ............................................... 14
2 FoxCom Device with Optional Power Supply .............................................................. 14
3 HART Device with Optional Power Supply ................................................................ 15
4 Analog FoxCom or HART Device Connected to
I/A Series System FBM01 or FBM04 ........................................................................... 15
5 Digital FoxCom Device Connected to I/A Series System
FBM18, 39, 43, 44, 46, 243, or 246 ............................................................................ 16
6 Analog or Digital FoxCom Device Connected to
I/A Series System FBM43, 44, or 243 with Remote Power .......................................... 16
1 Toolbar Icons ............................................................................................................... 24
2 Communications Toolbar Icons ................................................................................... 25
3 Info Window ............................................................................................................... 26
4 Top Level Menu Screen ............................................................................................... 29
5 Sample Password Security Options Screen ................................................................... 32
6 Sample Startup Options Screen .................................................................................... 34
7 Device Type Selection Dialog Box ............................................................................... 37
8 Model Selection Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 38
9 IFDC Device Selection Screen ..................................................................................... 40
10 Sample Device Toolbar ................................................................................................ 42
11 Sample Device Top Level Menu and Data Screen ........................................................ 43
12 Sample Compare Screen ............................................................................................... 51
13 Comments Screen ........................................................................................................ 52
14 Sample Field Device Status Screen ............................................................................... 53
15 Sample Diagnostic Codes Screen .................................................................................. 53
16 Sample Set mA/Pulse Screen ........................................................................................ 55
17 Help Topics Index Screen - Index Tab ......................................................................... 57
18 Sample Profibus Master Configuration Screen ............................................................. 61
19 Sample Profibus Slave Configuration Screen ................................................................ 64
1 PC20 Fault Analysis - Repeated Communication Failures (FoxCom Protocol) ............ 68
2 PC20 Fault Analysis - Repeated Communication Failures (HART Protocol) ............... 69
A-1 Sample Device Data Screen ........................................................................................... 71
A-2 Sample ReZero Screen................................................................................................... 76
A-3 Sample Point Calibration Screen ................................................................................... 77
A-4 Sample ReRange Screen (FoxCom Device).................................................................... 78
A-5 Sample ReRange Screen (HART Device) ...................................................................... 79
A-6 Sample mA Calibration Screen...................................................................................... 80
A-7 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen (HART Device) ............................................... 81
A-8 Sample Identifier Tab Screen (FoxCom Device) ............................................................ 82
A-9 Sample Identifier Tab Screen (HART Device) ............................................................... 83
A-10 Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen (FoxCom Device) ................. 84
A-11 Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen (HART Device).................... 85
B-1 Sample RTT10 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 89

xiii
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Figures

B-2 Sample RTT10 N-Point Calibration Screen .................................................................. 92

B-3 Sample RTT10 ReRange Screen.................................................................................... 93
B-4 Sample RTT10 Custom Input Curve Screen................................................................. 94
B-5 RTT10 Enable Custom Curve Screen ........................................................................... 95
B-6 Sample RTT10 mA Calibration Screen ......................................................................... 96
B-7 Sample RTT10 Identifier Tab Screen ............................................................................ 97
B-8 Sample RTT10 Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen....................................................... 98
C-1 Sample RTT20 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 101
C-2 Sample RTT20 N-Point Calibration Screen .................................................................. 105
C-3 Sample RTT20 Custom Input Curve Screen................................................................. 106
C-4 Sample RTT20 ReRange Screen.................................................................................... 107
C-5 Sample RTT20 Restore Factory Calibration Screen....................................................... 108
C-6 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen (FoxCom Device) ............................................ 109
C-7 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen (HART Device) ............................................... 110
C-8 Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen (FoxCom Device) ............................................... 111
C-9 Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen (HART Device) .................................................. 112
C-10 Sample RTT20 Input Tab Screen.................................................................................. 113
C-11 Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen (FoxCom Device) ................................................. 114
C-12 Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen (HART Device).................................................... 115
C-13 Sample RTT20 Display Tab Screen............................................................................... 116
D-1 Sample IMT20 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 119
D-2 Sample IMT20 ReRange Screen.................................................................................... 122
D-3 Sample IMT20 mA Calibration Screen ......................................................................... 123
D-4 Sample IMT20 Identifier Tab Screen ............................................................................ 124
D-5 Sample IMT20 Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen .............................................. 125
E-1 Sample IMT25 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 129
E-2 Sample IMT25 mA Calibration Screen (FoxCom Device) ............................................ 135
E-3 Sample mA Calibration Screen (HART Device)............................................................ 136
E-4 Sample IMT25 Reset Totals Screen ............................................................................... 137
E-5 Sample IMT25 Identifier Tab Screen ............................................................................ 138
E-6 Sample IMT25 Flow Tab Screen ................................................................................... 139
E-7 Sample IMT25 Alarms Tab Screen................................................................................ 140
E-8 Sample IMT25 Contacts Tab Screen............................................................................. 141
E-9 Sample IMT25 Options Tab Screen.............................................................................. 143
E-10 Sample IMT25 Display/Totalizer Tab Screen ................................................................ 144
F-1 Sample CFT10 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 147
F-2 Sample CFT10 ReZero Calibration Screen ................................................................... 151
F-3 Sample CFT10 mA Calibration Screen ......................................................................... 153
F-4 Sample CFT10 Identifier Tab Screen ............................................................................ 154
F-5 Sample CFT10 Units Tab Screen .................................................................................. 155
F-6 Sample CFT10 Pulse Output Tab Screen ...................................................................... 156
F-7 Sample CFT10 mA Mode Tab Screen ........................................................................... 157
F-8 Sample CFT10 Alarms Tab Screen................................................................................ 158
F-9 Sample CFT10 Solids Configuration Tab Screen .......................................................... 159
F-10 Sample CFT10 Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen .......................................................... 160
G-1 Sample CFT15 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 163
G-2 Sample CFT15 ReZero Calibration Screen ................................................................... 167
G-3 Sample CFT15 Identifier Tab Screen ............................................................................ 169

xiv
Figures MI 020-495 – November 2002

G-4 Sample CFT15 Units Tab Screen .................................................................................. 170

G-5 Sample CFT15 Outputs Tab Screen.............................................................................. 171
G-6 Sample CFT15 Current Tab Screen .............................................................................. 172
G-7 Sample CFT15 Solids Tab Screen.................................................................................. 173
G-8 Sample CFT15 Flowtube Tab Screen ............................................................................ 174
G-9 Sample CFT15 Modbus Tab Screen.............................................................................. 175
H-1 Sample Vortex Device Data Screen (FoxCom Device) ................................................... 179
H-2 Sample Vortex Device Data Screen (HART Device)...................................................... 180
H-3 Sample Vortex ReRange Screen ..................................................................................... 182
H-4 Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut-In Screen (FoxCom Device) ........................................... 183
H-5 Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut-In Screen (HART Device) .............................................. 184
H-6 Sample Vortex mA Calibration Screen (FoxCom Device) .............................................. 185
H-7 Sample mA Calibration Screen (HART Device)............................................................ 186
H-8 Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)................................ 186
H-9 Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen (HART Device) .................................. 187
H-10 Sample Vortex Flow Parameters Tab Screen................................................................... 188
H-11 Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)................................. 189
H-12 Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen (HART Device).................................... 190
I-1 Sample 870ITEC Device Data Screen........................................................................... 193
I-2 Sample 870ITEC Bench Calibration Screen.................................................................. 196
I-3 Sample 870ITEC Solution 1-Point Offset Screen.......................................................... 197
I-4 Sample 870ITEC Solution 1-Point Span Screen............................................................ 198
I-5 Sample 870ITEC Solution 2-Point Calibration Screen.................................................. 199
I-6 Sample 870ITEC Temperature Calibration................................................................... 200
I-7 Sample 870ITEC mA Calibration Screen...................................................................... 201
I-8 Sample 870ITEC Identifier Tab Screen......................................................................... 202
I-9 Sample 870ITEC Sensor Tab Screen ............................................................................. 203
I-10 Sample 870ITEC Measurement Tab Screen .................................................................. 204
I-11 Sample 870ITEC Misc Tab Screen................................................................................ 205
I-12 Sample 870ITEC App1 Tab Screen............................................................................... 206
J-1 Sample 870ITPH Device Data Screen........................................................................... 213
J-2 Sample 870ITPH 1-Point Manual Calibration Screen................................................... 216
J-3 Sample 870ITPH 2-Point Manual Calibration Screen................................................... 217
J-4 Sample 870ITPH Temperature Calibration Screen ....................................................... 218
J-5 Sample 870ITPH mA Calibration Screen ..................................................................... 219
J-6 Sample 870ITPH Identifier Tab Screen......................................................................... 220
J-7 Sample 870ITPH Sensor Tab Screen............................................................................. 221
J-8 Custom Buffers Screen .................................................................................................. 222
J-9 Custom Temperature Compensation Screen.................................................................. 222
J-10 Custom Chemical Compensation Screen ...................................................................... 223
J-11 Sample 870ITPH Output Tab Screen ........................................................................... 224
J-12 Sample 870ITPH Measurement Tab Screen.................................................................. 225
J-13 Sample 870ITPH Diagnostic Tab Screen ...................................................................... 226
K-1 Sample SRD991 Device Data Screen ............................................................................ 231
K-2 Standard Profibus Data Screen ...................................................................................... 232
K-3 Sample SRD991 Identifier Tab Screen .......................................................................... 241
K-4 Sample SRD991 Parameters Tab Screen........................................................................ 242
K-5 Sample SRD991 Configuration Tab Screen................................................................... 243

xv
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Figures

K-6 Sample SRD991 Characterization Tab Screen ............................................................... 244

K-7 Sample SRD991 Travel Tab Screen ............................................................................... 245
K-8 Sample SRD991 Alarms Tab Screen.............................................................................. 246
K-9 Sample SRD991 Tuning Tab Screen ............................................................................. 247
K-10 Sample SRD991 Pressure Tab Screen ............................................................................ 248
K-11 Sample SRD991 Options Tab Screen............................................................................ 249
K-12 Sample SRD991 Bin In Tab Screen............................................................................... 250
K-13 Sample SRD991 Bin Out Tab Screen............................................................................ 251
K-14 Sample Profibus Function Tab Screen ........................................................................... 252
L-1 Identification of a 140 Series Transmitter
Running in IPD10-B Compatibility Mode ................................................................... 258
L-2 Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter
in IDP10-B Compatibility Mode. ................................................................................. 258
L-3 Change Device Type Message Screen............................................................................. 259
L-4 Model Identification Message Screen............................................................................. 260
L-5 Model Selection Screen ................................................................................................. 260
L-6 Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter in the 140 Series Mode .......... 261
L-7 Sample Device Data Screen ........................................................................................... 263
L-8 Sample Device Status Screen ......................................................................................... 264
L-9 Sample Diagnostic Codes Screen................................................................................... 265
L-10 Sample Raw Input Value Screen .................................................................................... 266
L-11 Sample Identifier Tab Screen for a HART Transmitter .................................................. 267
L-12 Sample Profibus PV Tab Screen..................................................................................... 268
L-13 Sample Input Tab Screen............................................................................................... 269
L-14 Sample Characterization Tab Screen.............................................................................. 271
L-15 Sample Output Tab Screen............................................................................................ 272
L-16 Sample Profibus Out Tab Screen ................................................................................... 273
L-17 Sample Density Tab Screen ........................................................................................... 274
L-18 Sample Failsafe Handling Tab Screen ............................................................................ 275
L-19 Sample Device Tab Screen............................................................................................. 276
L-20 Sample Profibus Alarms Tab Screen............................................................................... 278
L-21 Sample ReZero Calibration Screen ................................................................................ 279
L-22 Sample Point Calibration Screen ................................................................................... 280
L-23 Sample mA Calibration Screen...................................................................................... 281
L-24 Sample Specification Sensor Tab Screen ........................................................................ 282
L-25 Sample Specification Displacer Tab Screen .................................................................... 283
M-1 Sample 870ITCR Device Data Screen........................................................................... 285
M-2 Sample 870ITCR Solution 1-Point Offset Screen.......................................................... 289
M-3 Sample 870ITCR Solution 1-Point Span Screen ........................................................... 290
M-4 Sample 870ITCR Solution 2-Point Calibration Screen ................................................. 291
M-5 Sample 870ITCR Temperature Calibration................................................................... 292
M-6 Sample 870ITCR mA Calibration Screen...................................................................... 293
M-7 Sample 870ITCR Identifier Tab Screen......................................................................... 294
M-8 Sample 870ITCR Sensor Tab Screen............................................................................. 295
M-9 Sample 870ITCR Measurement Tab Screen .................................................................. 296
M-10 Sample 870ITCR Misc Tab Screen................................................................................ 297
M-11 Sample 870ITCR App1 Tab Screen............................................................................... 298
N-1 Sample Non Foxboro Device Data Screen ..................................................................... 305

xvi
Figures MI 020-495 – November 2002

N-2 Sample Non Foxboro Identifier Tab Screen ................................................................... 306

N-3 Generic HART Input Screen......................................................................................... 307
N-4 Sample Non Foxboro Output Tab Screen...................................................................... 308
N-5 Generic HART Screen .................................................................................................. 309
N-6 Generic HART Commands Dialog Box to Execute Universal and
Common Practice Commands. ..................................................................................... 310
O-1 Sample IMT96 Device Data Screen .............................................................................. 313
O-2 Sample IMT96 mA Calibration Screen ......................................................................... 316
O-3 Sample IMT96 Reset Totals Screen ............................................................................... 317
O-4 Sample IMT96 Identifier Tab Screen ............................................................................ 319
O-5 Sample IMT96 Flow Tab Screen ................................................................................... 320
O-6 Sample IMT96 Alarms Tab Screen................................................................................ 321
O-7 Sample IMT96 Contacts Tab Screen............................................................................. 322
O-8 Sample IMT96 Options Tab Screen.............................................................................. 323
O-9 Sample IMT96 Display/Totalizer Tab Screen ................................................................ 324

xvii
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Figures

xviii
Tables
1 PC20 and IFDC Feature and Use Differences .............................................................. 1
2 Devices Supported ....................................................................................................... 2
3 Reference Documents .................................................................................................. 9
1 Toolbar Features and Descriptions ............................................................................... 24
2 Communications Toolbar Features and Descriptions ................................................... 25
3 Top Level Menu – Description of Functions ................................................................ 30
4 Device Top Level Menu – Description of Functions .................................................... 44
5 Compare Function Possibilities .................................................................................... 51
6 Raw Inputs Displayed for Various Devices ................................................................... 55
7 Profibus Master Configuration Screen – Field Descriptions ......................................... 61
8 Profibus Slave Page – Actions ....................................................................................... 63
1 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 72
2 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages ........................................................................ 73
3 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 86
4 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 90
5 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 99
6 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a FoxCom Transmitter ..................................... 102
7 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a HART Transmitter ........................................ 102
8 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 117
9 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 120
10 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages ........................................................................ 120
11 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 126
12 Transmitter Status Error Messages (FoxCom Devices) ................................................. 130
13 Transmitter Status Error Messages (HART Devices) .................................................... 132
14 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 145
15 Status Error Messages ................................................................................................... 148
16 Diagnostic Error Messages ........................................................................................... 149
17 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 161
18 Status Error Messages ................................................................................................... 164
19 Diagnostic Error Messages ........................................................................................... 165
20 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 176
21 Status Error Messages ................................................................................................... 180
22 Diagnostic Error Messages ........................................................................................... 181
23 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 191
24 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 194
25 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 207
26 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 214
27 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 227
28 Field Device Status Error Messages .............................................................................. 233
29 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 253
30 HART Transmitter Status ............................................................................................ 264
31 Device Specific Transmitter Status ............................................................................... 265
32 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 286

xix
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Tables

33 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 299

34 Universal Commands ................................................................................................... 310
35 Common Usage Commands ........................................................................................ 311
36 Transmitter Status Error Messages ............................................................................... 314
37 Sample Database Report .............................................................................................. 325

xx
Preface
This manual on the Intelligent Field Device Configurators (IFDC/PC20) explains how to install,
operate, and troubleshoot the configurator and how to operate, calibrate, configure, and
troubleshoot Foxboro® Intelligent Devices using the IFDC/PC20 software package.
Chapters 1, 2, 3, and 4 introduce the IFDC/PC20 and explain how to install IFDC/PC20, how
to operate the IFDC/PC20 program, and how to troubleshoot the IFDC/PC20 respectively.
This is followed by appendixes on each Foxboro Intelligent Device. Each appendix shows an
example of the device’s data screen, gives an explanation of the device’s status/diagnostic error
messages with recommended actions, explains how to calibrate and configure the device, and
shows a sample database report.
Therefore, to use this manual, refer to Chapter 1 “Introduction” to gain an understanding of the
IFDC and PC20 capabilities, to Chapter 2 “Installation” for an explanation of how to install
IFDC/PC20, and to Chapter 4 “Troubleshooting” for IFDC/PC20 troubleshooting procedures.
Refer to Chapter 3 “Operation” and the appropriate appendix for procedures on how to
communicate with your specific Foxboro Intelligent Device.

Device Appendix
820, 860, and I/A Series systems Pressure Transmitters A
RTT10 Temperature Transmitters B
RTT20 (TI20) Temperature Transmitters C
IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters D
IMT25/IMT25L Magnetic Flow Transmitters E
CFT10 Mass Flow Transmitters F
CFT15 Mass Flow Transmitters G
83 Series Vortex Flowmeters H
870ITEC Electrodeless Conductivity Transmitters I
870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters J
SRD991 Intelligent Positioner K
130/140 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters L
870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters M
Non Foxboro Devices N
IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters O

xxi
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Preface

xxii
1. Introduction
Overview
The Foxboro Intelligent Field Device Configurator is a software package providing remote
bidirectional communications with the Foxboro and Foxboro Eckardt Intelligent Field Devices.
The software is available in two different versions as follows:
♦ Model PC20, which includes an external modem for use on a user-supplied personal
computer
♦ The Intelligent Field Device Configurator (IFDC), which is a software component of
an I/A Series system.
Features of the Intelligent Field Device Configurators include:
♦ Accurate reranging without recalibration
♦ Unlimited device database storage on diskette or hard disk
♦ Full screen device database display
♦ Enhanced device diagnostic capability
♦ On-line Help and context-sensitive Help screens
♦ Direct access to Microsoft® Word and Excel (if installed)
♦ Field-proven FSK communication
♦ RFI/EMI protection
♦ Communications that do not affect output
♦ Remotely set device output to calibrate other devices in the loop
♦ Capability to reconfigure, copy, and clone databases
♦ Capability to upload and download device databases
♦ Capability to print out device databases
♦ User-configurable measurement data graphical trend display (PC20 only).
Both the PC20 and IFDC are functionally equivalent, but there are a few differences
regarding the features and use as shown in Table 1.

Table 1. PC20 and IFDC Feature and Use Differences

Subject PC20 IFDC

Support for FoxCom™ protocol devices See “Field Device See “Field Device Restrictions”
Restrictions” on page 6. on page 6.
Support for Foxboro HART™ devices Yes. Yes.
Support for non Foxboro HART devices Yes. Yes.
(universal and common practice
commands)

1
MI 020-495 – November 2002 1. Introduction

Table 1. PC20 and IFDC Feature and Use Differences (Continued)

Subject PC20 IFDC

Trending display Yes. No - use the I/A Series
system trending package.
Modem External modem attaches Integral in the Intelligent
to serial port of PC. FBM.
Attachment to field device Clip wires onto leads. Automatic connection
through the Intelligent FBMs
(18, 39, 43, 44, 46, 243, 246,
214, 215, 216, 218).

Field Devices Supported

The configurators support the devices shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Devices Supported

Version Protocol Devices Supported

PC20 FoxCom Pressure: 140, 820, 860, and I/A Series system Pressure
Temperature: RTT10, RTT20, and TI20 Series
Magnetic Flow: IMT10, IMT20, IMT25, IMT25L, and IMT96 Series
Mass Flow: CFT10 and CFT15 Series
Vortex: 83 Series
Electrochemical: 870ITEC, 870ITPH, and 870ITCR Series
Buoyancy: 140 Series
Intelligent Positioner: SRD991, SRD960, SRD970, and NAF LinkIT
HART Pressure: 130, 140, Foxboro I/A Series system Pressure, Invensys I/A Series
system Pressure, and Viatran I/A Series system Pressure
Temperature: RTT10, RTT20, and TI20 Series
Magnetic Flow: IMT25 and IMT25L Series
Vortex: 83 Series
Buoyancy: 130 and 140 Series
Intelligent Positioner: SRD991, SRD960, SRD970, and NAF LinkIT
Non Foxboro Devices: (Universal and Common Practice commands only)
Profibus Buoyancy: 140 Series (Profibus-PA)
Intelligent Positioner: SRD991, SRD960, SRD970, an NAF LinkIT (all
Profibus-PA)

2
1. Introduction MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 2. Devices Supported (Continued)

Version Protocol Devices Supported

IFDC FoxCom Pressure: 140, 820, 860, and I/A Series system Pressure
Temperature: RTT10, RTT20, and TI20 Series
Magnetic Flow: IMT10, IMT20, IMT25, IMT25L, and IMT96 Series
Mass Flow: CFT10 Series
Vortex: 83 Series
Electrochemical: 870ITEC, 870ITPH, and 870ITCR Series
Buoyancy: 140 Series
Intelligent Positioner: SRD991, SRD960, SRD970, and NAF LinkIT
Hydrostatic Tank Gauging: HTG (Solaris® only using ITMW, Intelligent
Transmitter Maintenance Workbench)
HART Pressure: 130, 140, Foxboro I/A Series system Pressure, Invensys I/A Series
system Pressure, and Viatran I/A Series system Pressure
Temperature: RTT10, RTT20, and TI20 Series
Magnetic Flow: IMT25 and IMT25L Series
Vortex: 83 Series
Buoyancy: 130 and 140 Series
Intelligent Positioner: SRD991, SRD960, SRD970, and NAF LinkIT
Non Foxboro Devices: (Universal and Common Practice commands only)

IFDC
The IFDC software package enables you to communicate with Foxboro Intelligent Devices via
Workstation Processors (WPs) and Application Workstations (AWs).
The IFDC supports AW/WP51s and AW/WP70s.
All Intelligent Field Devices are connected to the Foxboro Fieldbus through Fieldbus Modules or
interface modules. The Foxboro Fieldbus, in turn, is connected to the system through the Control
Processor (CP). The CP continually scans the device for its measurement and status data. This
data is stored in the CP database. If a device is connected and on-line, the information in the CP
always reflects the information in the device.
Figure 1 shows the relationships among processors and field devices.

3
MI 020-495 – November 2002 1. Introduction

Hard Drive
AW
Device Foxboro
Configuration Fieldbus
Database
Control
Processor

FBM
820
860
Upload
I/A Series Pressure
IFDC
RTT10, RTT20, TI20
IMT10, 20, 25, 25L
IMT96
Download 83
Xmtr 870ITPH, EC, CR
Control SRD991
WP 140
Database

CFT10

Default System
Display Management
HTG (Solaris only)
Display

Figure 1. Relationships Among Processors and Field Devices

Before you can configure a transmitter using the IFDC, you must use the Integrated Control
Configurator (ICC) to add an Equipment Control Block (ECB) or window ECB for the
transmitter to the system. Each type of ECB contains a set of parameters that allow normal
I/A Series system operation and describe the transmitter. The ECB types supported in the IFDC
are:
♦ ECB13: HTG (Solaris only).
♦ ECB18: 820, 860, and I/A Series system Pressure Transmitters, RTT10 and
RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters, IMT10, IMT20, IMT25, IMT25L, and
IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters, 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters,
870ITEC Electrochemical Transmitters, 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity
Transmitters, 140 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters, and 83 Vortex Flowmeters.
♦ ECB22: CFT10 Mass Flowmeters.
♦ ECB74: SRD991 Intelligent Positioner.
♦ ECB201: With the configuration HWTYPE = SWTYPE = 214 for HART
transmitter. With the configuration HWTYPE = SWTYPE = 215 for HART output
devices (for example, SRD991 Intelligent Positioner).
♦ ECB202: With the configuration HWTYPE = SWTYPE = 216 for HART
transmitter. With the configuration HWTYPE = SWTYPE = 218 for HART output
devices (for example, SRD991 Intelligent Positioner).

4
1. Introduction MI 020-495 – November 2002

NOTE
For more information on the ICC, refer to Integrated Control Configurator
(B0193AV) and Integrated Control Block Description (B0193AX).

If you make any changes in the field with a Hand-Held Terminal (HHT), PC10 Configurator, or
PC20 Configurator, always upload the changes to the I/A Series system database. Then compare
the I/A Series system and the device database. See “Compare Function” on page 51.

PC20
The PC20 Configurator hardware/software package is designed to run from a PC with a
Windows NT®, Windows® 95, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating system. It does not
run with a Windows 3.1 or Windows CE operating system.
NOTE
Windows 98 or Windows ME is not a Foxboro approved corporate software
operating system. However, problems are not expected when using PC20 with the
Windows 98 or Windows ME operating system.

The package includes an external modem that allows operation with any Windows compatible
computer with the following minimum requirements:
♦ 133 MHz Pentium® with 32 MB RAM or better
♦ 4x CD-ROM Drive (8x recommended)
♦ Hard drive with 16 MB of space for PC20
♦ RS-232 Serial Port (COM1 or COM2)
♦ Parallel Port (LPT1 or LPT2) to print reports
♦ Mouse or compatible pointing device.
Communication with Foxboro Intelligent Devices uses proven frequency shift keying (FSK)
techniques that do not affect the device output signal.

Standard Equipment with FoxCom Modem

The PC20 with a FoxCom modem includes the following items:
♦ PC20 software on one CD-ROM
♦ One Foxboro external modem (can be attached by Velcro® strips to back side of
laptop computers)
♦ One 5-foot cable (desktop PC to modem)
♦ One 1-foot cable (laptop PC to modem)
♦ One 5-foot cable for connecting the modem to device loop wiring or for connecting
the optional power supply to a device
♦ Velcro strips
♦ Instruction book on one CD-ROM
♦ Two test clips.

5
MI 020-495 – November 2002 1. Introduction

Standard Equipment with HART Modem

The PC20 with a HART modem includes the following items:
♦ PC20 software on one CD-ROM
♦ One HART external modem
♦ One 5-foot cable for connecting the modem to device loop wiring or for connecting
the optional power supply to a device
♦ Instruction book on one CD-ROM
♦ Two test clips.

Optional Equipment
The power supply option (120 V ac to 24 V dc converter) is used with devices that require a
24 V dc supply. The option is not required to power the modem because the power for the
modem is obtained through the serial port connection to the PC. The power supply option
cannot be used with ac line powered devices such as mass flowmeters and magnetic flow
transmitters. It can only be used with the SRD991 Intelligent Positioner when the positioner is
configured for FoxCom digital output.

! CAUTION
You can potentially damage an SRD991 Intelligent Positioner by attaching a dc power
supply to its 4 to 20 mA input terminals. The positioner input is a mA source, not a
voltage source. Therefore, the power supply option must not be used with any HART
protocol positioner or any FoxCom protocol positioner configured for 4 to 20 mA
input.

Field Device Restrictions

IFDC
The Intelligent Field Device Configurator for I/A Series system AW/WP51 (Solaris) and
AW/WP70 (Windows based PCs) stations supports all Intelligent Field Devices listed in Table 2.
For some devices, there are restrictions in the device support as described below.

Non Foxboro Devices (HART Protocol)

Only the Universal and Common Practice commands are supported. Device-specific commands
are not supported.

CFT10
Component Tag parameters for the Solids Configuration cannot be configured using IFDC. The
PC20 does allow component tag configuration.

6
1. Introduction MI 020-495 – November 2002

CFT15
The CFT15 is a Modbus® device. Therefore, IFDC running on I/A Series system stations cannot
configure the CFT15. The PC20 does support configuration and calibration of the CFT15.

SRD991
Setpoint Source (output mode) is not configurable from IFDC. The PC20 does allow
configuration of the setpoint source.

HTG
HTG configuration is possible only with IFDC on the primary display of AW/WP51 stations.
The ECB13 default display for the standard I/A Series system Display Manager and for
FoxView™ has the incorrect command behind the IT Maint button. For this reason, the IFDC
upgrade CD for the Solaris operating system installs new versions of the ECB13 default displays.
You must have FoxView Version 6.0e or later in order to have the ECB13 FoxView display work
correctly. If an older version of FoxView is installed and IFDC is installed, the ECB13 default
display does not work correctly and provides erroneous information. Also, after IFDC is installed,
installation of any upgrade of FoxView prior to I/A Series system Version 6.2 overwrites the
corrected FoxView ECB13 default display.
IFDC HTG configuration is not possible from AW/WP70 stations. In order to maintain
commonality between FoxView default displays on Solaris and Windows based stations, the
ECB13 default display on Windows based I/A Series system stations continues to have an IT
Maint button. However, do not attempt to invoke IFDC on a Windows based I/A Series system
from the ECB13 default display IT Maint button, as unpredictable results may occur.

PC20
Version 2.2 of the PC20 Configurator supports all devices listed in Table 2. For some devices
there are restrictions in the device support as described below.

HTG
PC20 does not support HTG. The integral keypad and display on the device can be used for
configuration functions. HTG can also be configured using IFDC (restrictions apply).

Non Foxboro Devices (HART Protocol)

Only the Universal and Common Practice commands are supported. Device-specific commands
are not supported.

Software Version 2.0 Enhancements

Software Version 2.0 includes the following enhancements:
♦ Full configuration capability for IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitter with HART
protocol
♦ Full configuration capability for 83 Series Vortex Transmitter with HART protocol
♦ IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitter with FoxCom protocol

7
MI 020-495 – November 2002 1. Introduction

♦ IGP10 Gauge Pressure Transmitter with Sensor F, G, and H

♦ IAP20 Absolute Pressure Transmitter
♦ An updated 140 Series Buoyancy Transmitter
♦ Calibration capability and IFDC support for 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity
Transmitter
♦ 130 Series Pressure Transmitter
♦ New functionality (FoxCom and HART protocol)
♦ Workshop Environment for faster communications
♦ Support for HART multi-drop communication
♦ Info Window (Device Characteristic, Audit Trail, and Error Trace)
♦ Export function for trending
♦ Startup options (Online/Offline, password, and security level)
♦ Import/Export device databases to popular database programs
♦ Improved functionality (FoxCom and HART protocol)
♦ Improved communications with devices integrated to I/A Series system
♦ Improved information and layout on database printing.

Software Version 2.2 Enhancements

Software version 2.2 includes the following enhancements:
♦ Full configuration for Multi-range Pressure Transmitter IxP25
♦ Full configuration for Premium Multi-range Pressure Transmitter IxP50
♦ Full configuration for Invensys and Viatran Transmitters using the HART Protocol
♦ Full configuration for the FoxCom and HART Intelligent Positioners SRD960,
SRD970, and NAF LinkIT
♦ New and improved functionality:
♦ Starting IFDC/PC20 is now independent of the protocol. It is possible to connect to
one device with FoxCom protocol and afterwards connect to another with HART
protocol without the need to leave and restart IFDC/PC20.
♦ Pre-Configuration for devices with different protocols (HART, FoxCom) could be
done in parallel.
♦ There is a new File > New dialog. This selection dialog shows in a tree view all
supported protocols and devices.
♦ Enhanced Generic HART configuration dialog boxes.
PC20 Software Version 2.2 includes the following enhancements:
♦ Full configuration for the Profibus-PA Intelligent Positioners SRD991, SRD960,
SRD970, and NAF LinkIT.
♦ Full configuration for the 140 Series Profibus-PA Buoyancy Transmitter.

8
1. Introduction MI 020-495 – November 2002

IFDC Software Version 2.2 includes the following enhancements:

♦ Full configuration support for all Foxboro and Foxboro Eckardt HART devices as
listed in Table 2.

Software Version 2.3 Enhancements

PC20 Software Version 2.3 includes the following enhancements:
♦ Support of Window 2000 and Windows XP stations
♦ Configuration support for I/A Series Pressure IGP10-B
♦ Configuration support for the 140 Series 240 subtypes.
IFDC Software Version 2.3 includes the following enhancements:
♦ Support of the Windows XP stations
♦ Support of the Solaris 8 stations.

Reference Documents
Table 3. Reference Documents

Device Type Description Instruction

I/A Series system System Equipment Installation B0193AC
Integrated Control Configurator B0193AV
Integrated Control Software Concepts B0193AW
Integrated Control Block Description B0193AX
Measurement Integration B0193RA
Intelligent Field Device Configurator B0400QL
(IFDC) Release Notes
I/A Series Intelligent Transmitters Wiring Guidelines MI 020-350
Model HHT Hand-Held Operation MI 020-466
Terminal
PC10 Intelligent Transmitter Installation and Operation MI 020-479
Configurator
83F and 83W Intelligent Vortex Installation, Configuration, MI 019-194
Flowmeters Troubleshooting, and Maintenance
(FoxCom Protocol)
Installation, Configuration, MI 019-199
Troubleshooting, and Maintenance (HART
Protocol)
820 Series Intelligent Transmitters Operation, Calibration, and Configuration MI 020-467
with HHT
860 Series Intelligent Transmitters Operation, Calibration, and MI 020-474
Configuration with HHT

9
MI 020-495 – November 2002 1. Introduction

Table 3. Reference Documents (Continued)

Device Type Description Instruction

I/A Series Intelligent Installation, Calibration, Configuration, MI 020-421
Pressure Transmitters and Maintenance (FoxCom Protocol) MI 020-424
MI 020-428
MI 020-429
Installation, Calibration, Configuration, MI 020-416
and Maintenance (HART Protocol) MI 020-417
MI 020-423
MI 020-426
Operation, Calibration, and MI 020-476
Configuration with HHT
IMT10 I/A Series Operation, Calibration, and Configuration MI 021-376
Magflow Transmitters
IMT20 I/A Series Operation, Calibration, and Configuration MI 021-383
Magflow Transmitters Operation, Calibration, and MI 021-385
Configuration with HHT
IMT25 I/A Series Operation, Calibration, and Configuration MI 021-390
Magflow Transmitters Operation, Calibration, and Configuration MI 021-397
with HART Communications MI 021-398
IMT96 I/A Series Operation, Calibration, and Configuration MI 021-403
Magflow Transmitters
CFT10 Series Operation and Configuration with MI 019-122
Mass Flow Transmitters Integral Keypad
Operation, Calibration, and MI 019-123
Configuration with HHT
CFT15 Series Operation, and Configuration with MI 019-128
Mass Flow Transmitters Integral Keypad
870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Installation, Configuration, Operation, and MI 611-216
Transmitters Maintenance
870ITEC Electrodeless Installation, Configuration, Operation, and MI 611-212
Conductivity Transmitters Maintenance
870ITPH pH/ISE/ORP Installation, Configuration, Operation, and MI 611-211
Transmitters Maintenance
RTT10 Series Temperature Installation, Maintenance, and Wiring MI 020-459
Transmitters Operation, Calibration, Configuration MI 020-468
with HHT

10
1. Introduction MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 3. Reference Documents (Continued)

Device Type Description Instruction

RTT20 Series Temperature Installation, Configuration, Operation, MI 020-453
Transmitters Calibration, and Maintenance
Operation, Configuration, and MI 020-460
Calibration with HART Communicator
Operation, Calibration, and MI 020-469
Configuration with HHT
TI20 Temperature Transmitters Installation, Configuration, Operation, and EMT 0111 A
Maintenance
SRD991 Intelligent Positioner Installation, Configuration, Operation, and MI EVE 0105 A
Maintenance
130 Series Pressure Transmitters Installation, Configuration, Operation, and
Maintenance
131GP/132AP EMP 0510 A
133DP EMP 0530 A
134FP EML 2510 A
134LD EML 0510 A
134LVD EML1510 A
140 Series Pressure and Level Installation, Configuration, Operation, and
Transmitters Maintenance
141GP/142AP EMP 0610 A
143DP EMP 0630 A
144FP EML 2610 A
144LD EML 0610 A
144LVD EML 1610 A

11
MI 020-495 – November 2002 1. Introduction

12
2. Installation
PC20 Hardware Installation
! WARNING
The FoxCom and HART modems shipped with the PC20 are not intrinsically safe
and should not be connected directly to an intrinsically safe circuit. It is permissible to
connect these modems to the safe side of an intrinsically safe barrier.
The HHT (FoxCom protocol) or Model 275 (HART protocol) hand-held
configurator, used in an area for which it is certified, can be connected to an
intrinsically safe circuit for which it is rated.
The MOD991 modem, used with the PC20 in a safe area, can be connected to
intrinsically safe circuits for which it is rated.

! CAUTION
You can potentially damage an SRD991 Intelligent Positioner by attaching a dc power
supply to its 4 to 20 mA input terminals. Refer to MI EVE 0105 for detailed wiring
connections.

NOTE
All hardware used with the PC10 configurator can be used with the PC20. Just load
the PC20 software into your personal computer and use your existing hardware. All
PC20 connections between the computer, the device, and the modem are identical
to those used with the PC10.
Do not use PC10 and PC20 on the same personal computer in sequence. The
packages use different drivers. You must reboot your system if you want to use the
PC10 after using PC20 and vice versa.

NOTE
All hardware used with the ABO991 configurator can be used with the PC20.
Install the Windows operating system and load the PC20 software into your
personal computer and use your existing hardware. All PC20 connections between
the computer, the device, the modem, and the optional power supply are identical
to those used with the ABO991.

Attaching the Modem to the Serial Port

Attach your modem to your computer serial port (COM1 or COM2). If the computer serial port
has a 25-pin connector, use a 25- to 9-pin adapter.
NOTE
It is possible to use COM port 3 and COM port 4 but you must determine and
enter the Base Port Address (hex) and the Interrupt Request (IRQ) data.

13
MI 020-495 – November 2002 2. Installation

Connecting the Modem to a Field Device

NOTE
1. The loop must have a minimum of 250 ohms between the power supply and the
attachment of the modem.
2. PC20 can communicate with devices connected in a HART multidrop loop.

250 OHM
RESISTOR
24 V dc + + FIELD
POWER DEVICE
SUPPLY -

MODEM

RS-232 CABLE TO
SERIAL PORT OF
COMPUTER

Figure 1. Analog FoxCom or HART Device with Remote Power

120 V ac/24 V dc
TRANSFORMER/RECTIFIER

OPTIONAL
POWER SUPPLY RED
UNIT +
INTELLIGENT
POWER (with 250 ohm DEVICE
series resistor) BLACK
CONNECTOR

MODEM

NOTE: 250 OHM RESISTANCE INCLUDED IN POWER SUPPLY BOX

RS-232 cable to
serial port of
computer

Figure 2. FoxCom Device with Optional Power Supply

14
2. Installation MI 020-495 – November 2002

120 V ac/24 V dc
TRANSFORMER/RECTIFIER

OPTIONAL
POWER SUPPLY RED
UNIT + INTELLIGENT
(with 250 ohm DEVICE
POWER series resistor) BLACK
CONNECTOR

MODEM

NOTE: 250 OHM RESISTANCE INCLUDED IN POWER SUPPLY BOX RS-232 CABLE TO
SERIAL PORT OR
COMPUTER

Figure 3. HART Device with Optional Power Supply

250 ohm
RESISTOR
FBM01 + + FIELD
AND DEVICE
FBM04 -

MODEM

RS-232 CABLE TO
SERIAL PORT OF
COMPUTER

Figure 4. Analog FoxCom or HART Device Connected to

I/A Series System FBM01 or FBM04

15
MI 020-495 – November 2002 2. Installation

+ + FIELD
FBM18, 39,
43, 44, 46, DEVICE
243, or 246 -

MODEM

RS-232 CABLE TO
SERIAL PORT OF
COMPUTER

Figure 5. Digital FoxCom Device Connected to I/A Series System

FBM18, 39, 43, 44, 46, 243, or 246

RS-232 CABLE TO
SERIAL PORT OF
COMPUTER

POWER MODEM
SUPPLY

+ + FIELD
FBM43, 44, OR 243 DEVICE
-

Figure 6. Analog or Digital FoxCom Device Connected to

I/A Series System FBM43, 44, or 243 with Remote Power

Connecting a Printer
If hard copy reports are required, a standard text printer with a parallel interface connected to the
PC printer port (LPT1 or LPT2) or a network accessible printer must be provided. Reports can
also be saved to text files and printed later.

Hardware Installation for Profibus Device

To connect your PC to a Profibus-PA device (for example, SRD991, 140 Series) the following
components are needed:
1. A Profibus interface card from Softing AG with the PAPI software interface. For a
desktop PC, the following interface cards could be used:
♦ PROFIboard ISA Master/Slave (PB-IF-03)
♦ PROFIboard PCI Master/Slave (PB-IF-1MS)
♦ PROFIboard PCI with 1xMaster and 1xMaster/Slave (PB-IF-2MS).

16
2. Installation MI 020-495 – November 2002

For a laptop it could be a PC card (PCMCIA) for Type II slots:

♦ PROFIcard Master PB-PCcard).
2. A segment coupler for Profibus-PA, for example, from Pepperl+Fuchs
(KFD2-BR-Ex1.2PA.93). This coupler is needed to couple the Profibus-DP™ side
(supported by the Softing interface cards) with the Profibus-PA devices in the
Profibus-PA segment.

PC20 Software Installation

Perform installation while running the standard Windows based installation program. Close all
other running programs before starting your installation.
Install the CD-ROM in your computer and select:
Start
Settings
Control Panel
Add/Remove Programs
Then follow instructions to install the PC20 program using A:\Setup as the command.
The installation procedure is automatic and prompts you for necessary information. The
installation program verifies that the PC has the hardware and memory necessary to load and
run PC20.
After installation is complete, reboot your computer.

Software Installation for Profibus Cards

For the PROFIboard or PROFIcard, the appropriate driver and Profibus Control Panel from
Softing must be installed. Please refer to the user manual from Softing for detailed installation
description.
Before you start PC20 for Profibus Devices, check to see if the Profibus interface card is working
correctly.
♦ Go to Control Panel > Profibus.
The Profibus Control Panel software from Softing should show a green mark at the
chosen interface card node.
♦ If you have any problems installing the Softing interface please contact Softing AG:
Phone +49 (0)89 4 56 56-0
Email [email protected].

IFDC Software Installation

For IFDC software installation, refer to Intelligent Field Device Configurator (IFDC) Release
Notes (B0400QL).

17
MI 020-495 – November 2002 2. Installation

PC20 Instruction Book CD-ROM Installation

The PC20 instruction book for the Intelligent Field Device Configurator is provided on
CD-ROM. Put the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM tray and install per the instruction on the
CD-ROM label. After installation, launch the PC20 program. Then select Options > Settings
from the toolbar. In the Directories tab screen, the following run command in the MI dialog box
might be displayed:
C:\Acrobat3\Reader\AcroRd32.exe D:\PC20\ENTRY.PDF
PC20 tries to find the executable for the Acrobat Reader® and enters it on the left side. (In this
example C:\ is the drive containing the Acrobat Reader.) Please correct this entry if the path entry
is not correct or you want to use another version of the Acrobat Reader. The second part points to
the path with the Instruction Book CD-ROM. (In this example, D:\ is the CD-ROM drive.)
Please remember that the CD-ROM must be installed in the drive when accessing the instruction
book (via the MI icon on the toolbar).

18
3. Operation
Running the PC20 Program
To run the program, double-click the PC20 icon or access the program from the Start menu.
The PC20 program may be started with different arguments. To see the program arguments,
right-click on the shortcut icon and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab. The Target
dialog box shows the program arguments.
After installation of PC20, the program arguments are defined as follows: For example,
“C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\foxifdc.exe” -prot all
This program argument causes PC20 to start in the flexible protocol mode. After starting PC20
the user is asked for the protocol of the device to which a connection should be established. Select
the protocol (for example, FoxCom, HART or Profibus) and press OK to connect to the device.
Select Cancel if PC20 should not connect to a device and to do Pre-Configuration. In the flexible
protocol mode it is possible to connect to one device with FoxCom protocol and afterwards to
connect to another device with HART protocol without the need to leave and restart PC20.
Furthermore Pre-Configuration for devices with different protocols (HART, FoxCom, Profibus)
could be done in parallel.
If PC20 should always connect to a device with the same protocol at startup, set the “-prot”
keyword, which indicates the protocol.
♦ For FoxCom devices, set the following protocol flag:
“C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\foxifdc.exe” -prot X
♦ For HART devices, set the following protocol flag:
“C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\foxifdc.exe” -prot H
♦ For Profibus set the following protocol flag:
“C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\foxifdc.exe” -prot P
If PC20 is not yet connected to a device, the top level menu screen, as shown in Figure 11,
appears. This top level screen has a pull-down menu for selecting the various functions. If PC 20
is already connected to a device, the device data screen, similar to that shown in Figure 11,
appears.
Use the mouse and/or cursor as you would in any standard Windows program. You can move the
cursor from item to item by using the mouse, the arrow keys, or by pressing the underlined letter
of the menu item. You can select the highlighted menu item by clicking the left button of the
mouse or by pressing Enter.

19
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Running the IFDC Program

Start IFDC on the I/A Series workstations one of two ways:
1. Using the standard I/A Series Display Manager or FoxView, the default displays for
the ECBs which support Intelligent Devices (for example, FoxCom, HART) have an
IT Maint or IFDC button. Selecting the IT Maint (or IFDC) button starts IFDC and
IFDC connects directly to the displayed device.
2. From the menu of the standard I/A Series Display Manager or FoxView select
Config - IT_Maint to start IFDC. IFDC displays the Device Selection Dialog. The
Device Selection dialog shows in a tree structure the CPs, ECBs and channels (device
block names) which are able to support Intelligent Devices. After you select a channel
and press the Connect button, IFDC establishes a connection to the selected device.
NOTE
After configuration changes (for example, after new FBMs and devices are added),
the tree information within the Device Selection dialog boxes needs to be updated
by selecting the Refresh button.

General Information
Because the programs can be connected to a variety of Foxboro Intelligent Devices and can
perform a variety of functions, menu items may be missing or “grayed out.” Missing menu items
are never allowed for the connected device. Grayed out items are not allowed under the present
condition but may be allowed under different conditions. For example, mA Calibration would be
available for a device configured with a 4 to 20 mA output but grayed out for a device configured
for a digital output.

Database Files
The tremendous benefits derived from using microprocessor-based devices is well known and
accepted throughout the process control industries. But the advantages also require the proper
management of the database files. The field device contains the Master database. It is suggested
that you also save a computer-based database file of each device to help facilitate a quick and easy
repair if needed. If an amplifier were to fail and the database were stored in the computer, the
repair would be fast and easy. Just replace the amplifier, call up the stored database file from the
computer, and download it to the repaired device. For most devices, the repair is completed
without even recalibrating the device (see the device-specific instruction for the detailed
replacement procedure).
When dealing with any Intelligent Device, you must remember that there are multiple database
files accessed while using the IFD Configurator software:
♦ The master database file stored in the EEPROM of the device
♦ A stored database in the computer, which should always be updated when the device
parameters are changed

20
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

♦ A temporary database file that is active in the software program while you are making
parameter changes. This temporary file normally would be downloaded to the
connected device or stored as a database file in the computer.
♦ When digitally connected to an I/A Series system, the system contains the complete
database file in the active control software, based upon the last time the database was
uploaded from the device.

File Management
It is strongly recommended that you save each device database to a file. When you save the device
database, the default filename uses the first eight characters from the tag number of the device.
You may modify your database filename by using up to 256 characters, which constitutes a long
filename in Windows based operating systems.
Every time a device database is modified by using any of the configuration tools (PC10, PC20,
HHT, ABO991, M275, and integral pushbuttons), the new database should be saved. When it is
saved using the default first eight characters from the device tag number, the old database file is
overwritten by the new file. If you want to save the old database file configurations, you have to
change the filename. One suggestion would be to add the date of the database change to the
electronic filename to aid tracking down the latest file.

File Location for PC20

When the software is installed, the default location for all of the database files is:
C:\Program Files\Foxboro\IFDC\Data
This location is the default storage location unless modified during the installation of PC20
software. To help locate various devices by instrument type, rather than just by tag number, you
may want to add subdirectories to the default location, such as:
Pressure
Flow
Level
Electrochem
Positioners.
Also, if the plant has both FoxCom and HART devices, you may want to add subdirectories of
HART and FoxCom before or after the above suggested subdirectories.

Database File Compatibility

PC20 to PC20
Any database file created with an earlier PC20 release (for example, 1.0 or 2.0) is totally
compatible on any other computer running the latest PC20 revision. Any database file created
with PC20 BETA software may not be compatible. If you were a Foxboro BETA tester, we
recommend that you resave all device database files.

21
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

PC20 to IFDC
♦ Beginning with Version 2.2. of PC20 and IFDC, any PC20 database for any device
other than the Mass Flow Transmitter (CFT10 and CFT15) is interchangeable with
IFDC (Windows and Solaris versions).
♦ For database files generated with PC20 versions before Rev 2.2 the following
restrictions must be considered:
♦ Any PC20 database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter CFT10 is
interchangeable with IFDC (Windows version only)
♦ Any Mass Flow Transmitter (CFT10 and CFT15) database created in PC20 is not
compatible with a Solaris or Windows version of IFDC
♦ Any PC20 database for any device is not compatible with IFDC (Solaris version only).
♦ For database files generated with PC20 versions before Rev 2.2 the following
restrictions must be considered:
♦ Any PC20 database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter CFT10 is
interchangeable with IFDC (Windows version only)
♦ Any Mass Flow Transmitter (CFT10 and CFT15) database created in PC20 is not
compatible with a Solaris or Windows version of IFDC
♦ Any PC20 database for any device is not compatible with IFDC (Solaris version only).

IFDC to PC20
♦ Beginning with Version 2.2. of PC20 and IFDC, any IFDC (Windows and Solaris
version) database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter (CFT10 and
CFT15) is interchangeable with PC20.
♦ For database files generated with IFDC versions before Rev 2.2, the following
restrictions have to be considered:
♦ All IFDC databases for any device created with a Solaris system are not compatible
with PC20.
♦ All IFDC databases for any device created with a Solaris system are not compatible
with IFDC on a Windows based system.
♦ All IFDC databases for any device other than a Mass Flow Transmitter created on a
Windows based system are interchangeable with PC20.
♦ Any Mass Flow Transmitter database created in a Solaris or Windows version of IFDC
is not compatible in PC20.
NOTE
IFDC and PC20 versions before Rev 2.2 have several restrictions to exchange the
device database files. Beginning with Version 2.2. of PC20 and IFDC (Windows
and Solaris versions), the device database format changed to overcome these
restrictions. It is recommended that, after the upgrade to Rev. 2.2, all device
database files should be stored in the new format (use menu File - Save). This new
file format will also be supported in successive versions of the Intelligent Field
Device Configurators.

22
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

NOTE
The old device database format (created by IFDC or PC20 versions before Rev. 2.2)
will no longer be supported (after Rev. 2.2). Please resave all device database files
with the Rev. 2.2 release.

ABO991 to PC20/IFDC
HART database files created in ABO991 are not compatible with PC20 and IFDC. If you are
using ABO991 V3.6, it is possible to write a PC20 specific database file which can be imported to
the PC20 software using File > Import.
The Import menu item is only available when connected to a device or when an off-line
configuration dialog is open (preconfiguration using File > Open or File > New). To convert
ABO991 database files into PC20 database files:
1. Generate the PC20 files using ABO991 V3.6.
2. Within PC20 select File > New. Select the same device type as stored in the ABO991
database file.
3. Select File > Import to import the ABO991 database file. Select Override
Configuration Data Only if only the configuration data should be imported.
Select Override Full Database if all data should be imported.
4. Save the PC20 file using File > Save.

PC10 to PC20
The vast majority of a PC10 database file is compatible with PC20. However, the PC10 database
file has no internal marker to indicate if it contains valid calibration data. For example, a
preconfigured PC10 database file does not contain valid calibration data [the calibrated range
(LRV and URV) are part of the user database and will be downloaded]. Therefore, when you open
a PC10 database file in PC20, you can only download the user database, which does not contain
the calibration information. But once you have downloaded that PC10 file using PC20, you can
just resave the device database back to the file and it then includes any specific calibration
information previously stored in the device.

! CAUTION
The PC10 database format will no longer be supported (after IFDC/PC20 Rev. 2.2).
Please resave all device database files with the IFDC/PC20 Rev. 2.2 release.

HART Model 275 Hand Held Configurator to PC20/IFDC

All database files created with a HART Model 275 hand held configurator are not compatible
with PC20/IFDC.

HHT to PC20
There is a database file transfer function in PC10 that allows direct upload of databases from a
HHT when the HHT and PC10 are physically connected to each other. That function is not
implemented in PC20.

23
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

PC20 to PC10/ABO991
The Windows based PC20 database files are not backward compatible with the older MS-DOS®
based PC10 and ABO991 software.

Import/Export PC20 Database Files to Popular Database Software

Programs
IFDC/PC20 has an Import/Export function to exchange database files with popular database
software programs. See more details about the Import / Export format in “ASCII Format for
Import and Export” on page 49.

Device Output Protection

If a selected function modifies the device output, the caution shown below is displayed:
The device’s output is modified during this procedure. Leaving the
control loop in automatic may cause a process upset. Press Continue
when the control loop is in manual mode, or Cancel to abort.

Toolbar
The program is equipped with a toolbar at the top of the screen. It can be shown or hidden at any
time by using the View menu. The icons on the toolbar are shown in Figure 1. A listing of the
features and descriptions for the toolbar is given in Table 1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 1. Toolbar Icons

Table 1. Toolbar Features and Descriptions

Item Feature Description

1 Preconfigure Creates a preconfiguration database using a default database as a template.
New
2 Database Edit Edits an existing stored configuration database.
3 Save Saves the active configuration database to a file.
4 Print Prints the active configuration database.
5 FoxDoc™ Executes the FoxDoc application.
6 MI Displays the instruction manual.
7 About Displays the software version number.
8 Help Enables user to click on any item so that help for that item is displayed.

24
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

An additional communication toolbar is also displayed at the top of the screen. It can be shown or
hidden at any time by using the View menu. The icons on the toolbar are shown in Figure 2. A
listing of the features and descriptions for the toolbar is given in Table 2.

1 2 3

Figure 2. Communications Toolbar Icons

Table 2. Communications Toolbar Features and Descriptions

Item Feature Description

1 Connect to Device Establishes communication to the device connected to the
modem for PC20 or brings up the Device Select
dialog box. Then connects to the selected device.
2 Save to Device If connected to a device, saves the configuration
information to the connected device. Otherwise, not
available.
3 Upload Database from Device If connected to a device, restarts uploading the
configuration database from the device again.

Status Bar
The program is equipped with a status bar at the bottom of the screen. It can be shown or hidden
at any time by using the View menu. The status bar displays four items of information.
♦ On the left, it displays a brief description of the action of menu items as you navigate
through a menu with arrow keys. It also displays a brief description of the action of
items in the toolbar.
On station with Solaris operating system, it displays the text An open dialog locks
the main window when a dialog box is open. This should help you avoid a locking
situation where a dialog is open and was pushed behind the IFDC main window. The
main window is locked until the open dialog box is closed. Resize the mainframe
(make it smaller) so that the dialog box is accessible again or select the Back menu
item in the upper left system menu and close the open dialog box.
♦ In the center, it displays the parameter currently being accessed.
♦ Next, if the active window is connected with the device or if it is a preconfiguration
dialog box, it displays the type of connection with the device:
♦ Pre-Config (preconfiguration)
♦ FoxCom Modem (direct communication through the FoxCom modem, PC20 only)
♦ HART Modem (direct communication through the HART modem, PC20 only)
♦ FoxCom FBM (connection via the I/A Series system FoxCom FBM)
♦ HART FBM (connection via the I/A Series system HART FBM)

25
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

♦ Last, it displays the communication status or action being taken:

♦ Online (for the selected window there is a connection to the device)
♦ Not connected (for the selected window not device is connected)
♦ Retrieving (reading information from the device)
♦ Storing (information in the device)
♦ Wait for OM (IFDC is waiting for response from the I/A Series Object Manager)
♦ Wait for PT IPC (IFDC is waiting for response from the I/A Series Pass Thru
Interprocess Communication Component).

Info Window
The program is equipped with an info window at the bottom of the screen that can be shown or
hidden by using the View menu. It can be resized with a mouse. To resize the info window, move
the mouse over the border (the courser changes to the resizing symbol) and hold down the right
mouse button for resizing. The info window can display three types of information, each with its
own tab: Device Characteristic, Audit Trail, and Error Trace.
NOTE
The info window is only displayed when a device is connected. It is not available for
preconfiguration.

Figure 3. Info Window

Device Characteristic Tab

Under the Device Characteristic tab, the info window displays the most important pieces of
information, which dominate the behavior of a device. For a transmitter, it is the lower and upper
range values, the units, and the date of last calibration.
For some devices (for example, SRD991) it takes a while until the information is loaded from the
device and displayed. For other devices, it is displayed immediately.

26
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Audit Trail Tab

Under the Audit Trail tab, the info window lists all parameters which are downloaded to the
device. Each parameter which is written into a device is listed in a line with the date and time, the
parameter name and description, and the value. Dependent upon the protocol, some parameters
are written to the device with a command which writes several parameters at once. In such a case,
not only the changed parameter is displayed in the Audit Trail box, but also all the other
parameters which are part of the message.
The Audit Trail collects all changes done with a device during a session. A session starts when
IFDC/PC20 connects to the device and ends when the connection is closed. This collection of
information is very important in tracking the history of a device. It also helps to control changes
during configuration.
It is possible to configure IFDC/PC20 to generate an audit trail file at the end of each session
automatically. To enable IFDC/PC20 to do this, you need to include the following statement into
the INI file foxifdc.INI with a text editor (for example, Notepad). The foxifdc.INI file is located
in the system directory C:\WINNT for Windows NT and Window 2000 operating systems or
C:\Windows for Windows 95 and Windows XP operating systems. On the Solaris operating
system, the initialization file has the path and filename: /.foxifdc.ini.
Under [Directories] specify the pathname where PC20 should store the audit trail files after the
keyword ADT Path=.

Example for Windows [Directories]

operating system: ADT
Path=C:\ProgramFiles\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\data
Example for Solaris [Directories]
operating system: ADT Path=/temp/

After each session in which a parameter was written to the device (and only in this case),
IFDC/PC20 writes a file into the specified directory. The filename is composed of the Tag
Number, the date (Month/Day/Year) and time (Hour:Minute:Second) and has the extension
_ADT.txt.
Example: FT101_02-18-00_17-37-52_ADT.txt
The automatic generation of such files is only possible when the tag number can be used as a valid
filename. It should not contain special characters such as “\”, “/”, or “:”.
To import the audit trail information into other programs, select the appropriate ASCII import
function within the other program.

Example for Microsoft Excel

In Microsoft Excel, choose File > Open. For the file type, select Text Files to list all files and
select the desired file with the ending _ADT.txt. The Excel Import Assistant guides you through
the definition of the import format:
1. Start the import with line number 1.
2. The fields are separated by tabs.

27
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

3. Select General for all columns.

4. Import the file.
It is now possible to use the Excel functions (for example, sorting) and store this file in the Excel
format.
The imported information is displayed in several columns. The first row shows the headings for
each column. For each parameter written to the device, you have an additional row. The first
column contains the date and time when the change occurred. The second column shows the
unique identifier of each parameter within a device. The third column shows the parameter
description. The last column contains the parameter value. The value might be a real, integer,
date, string, and so forth.

Example for Microsoft Access

In Microsoft Access open your database. Choose File > External Data > Import. For the file
type, select *.* and select the desired file with the extension adt. The Access Import Assistant
guides you through the definition of the import format:
Start the import with line number 1.
The fields are separated by tabs.
The first row contains the headings for each field.
The fields are separated by tabs.
Import the file.
The audit trail information is imported in several fields. For each parameter written to the device,
you have an additional row. The first field contains the date and time the change occurred. The
second field shows the unique identifier of each parameter within a device. The next column
shows the parameter description. The last column contains the parameter value. The value can be
a real, integer, date, string, and so forth.

Error Trace Tab

The Error Trace tab lists all errors (communication errors, error response messages from the
device, and so forth) in a list box. Each error message starts with the date and time. The Error
Trace function helps you to track the history of errors during a session.
IFDC uses several background processes (threads), for example, to upload or download
parameters or to update the cyclic data. If a background process displays a message (error, warning
or information message) in a dialog box, the system may lock up because of thread issues.
Therefore, an error in the background process generates a message in the Error Trace window. The
Tab window is brought to the foreground and a yellow and white color message button is
displayed. This button informs you that there is a new message displayed in the Error Trace
window. You should:
♦ read the message
♦ acknowledge the message by pressing the Message button.
When you acknowledge a message, the Message button disappears and the Tab Window that
was pushed into the background is pushed to the foreground again. When a new message is
generated, the Message button pops up again.

28
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

When you disconnect a device, this information is lost. To help Foxboro service personnel locate
an error, please use the “PC20 Trace Function”or “IFDC Trace Function”described on page 66.

Top Level Menu Screen

The top level menu screen, shown in Figure 4, is displayed when your I/A Series system/personal
computer is not connected to a device or when no preconfiguration data is loaded onto a window.
This screen has pull-down menus for selecting the various functions. Explanations of the menus
and functions appear in Table 3.

Figure 4. Top Level Menu Screen

29
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Table 3. Top Level Menu – Description of Functions

Top Level
Menu
Pick Submenu Pick Description
File New Ctrl+N Creates a preconfiguration database using a default database as a
template.
Open Ctrl+O Edits an existing configuration database.
Connect to Device Connects to a device directly or using I/A Series Pass-Through.
Print Setup Changes the printer and printing options.
(File Names) Shows most recently accessed files for quick access.
Exit Quits the application; prompts to save documents.
Profibus Configuration To enable connection to a Profibus device, first the Profibus
master must be configured and then the slave address must be
defined to connect with the slave device. These tasks may be
accomplished in the Profibus Configuration dialog box.
View Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar.
StatusBar Shows or hides the status bar.
Utilities FOX FLOW Executes the FoxFlow application.
CON VALVE Executes the ConValve application.
FOX DOC Executes the FoxDoc application.
User MS Word Executes MS Word.
MS Excel Executes MS Excel.
Run ... Runs any program.
(User Application 1) Launches a user-specified application (if defined).
(User Application 2) Launches a user-specified application (if defined).
(User Application n) Launches a user-specified application (if defined).
Options Settings Modifies the application settings. See details below.
User Defines up to nine user applications to add to user menu.
Change Security Level Provides password access.
Help Index Lists Help topics.
Using Help Displays instructions about how to use Help.
MI Displays the instruction manual.
About Displays the version number.

Settings
Settings is accessed via the Options menu. It provides four tab screens: Directories, IFD Modem
Setup, Password/Security Options, and Startup Options.

30
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Directories
This tab allows you to identify the location of various programs used in conjunction with the
Intelligent Field Device Configurator. Type in the location of the executable file for each
application. The FoxDoc file for Field Measurement and Control is:
C:\Acrobat3\Reader\AcroRd32.exe D:\FOXDOC\ENTRY.PDF
if C:\ is the drive containing the Acrobat Reader and D:\ is the CD-ROM drive.
The MI file for the Intelligent Field Device Configurator is:
C:\Acrobat3\Reader\AcroRd32.exe D:\PC20\ENTRY.PDF
if C:\ is the drive containing the Acrobat Reader and D:\ is the CD-ROM drive.

IFD Modem Setup

Follow the instructions that appear when you select this tab.

Password/Security Options
Different security levels can be set to protect the devices from unintended changes or to restrict
access to certain functions to certain qualified personnel. Depending on the access level, certain
menu items are not available (grayed out or not visible). The following access levels are available:
♦ None: Only allows viewing and documenting device data.
♦ Test: Allows test tasks and tasks listed under None.
♦ Calibration: Allows calibration tasks and tasks listed under None and Test.
♦ Configuration: Allows configuration changes and all tasks listed under None, Test,
and Calibration.
♦ Workshop: Allows workshop and factory tasks and all tasks listed under None, Test,
Calibration, and Configuration (not available for IFDC).
It is possible to configure a different password for each security level (with the exception of
None).
NOTE
Passwords are case sensitive.

To enter/change a password for a certain security level, select the security level from the menu,
type in the old password (if any), the new password, and the new password again under Confirm
Password. Then select Apply Password. To enter no password for a level, leave the New
Password and Confirm Password fields blank.

! CAUTION
The Workshop level should be limited to the most knowledgeable people; others can
damage the device.

31
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Figure 5. Sample Password Security Options Screen

PC20 Security Protection

Each time PC20 is started, you are asked for the security level and the password for this level.
PC20 also allows you to switch off the password protection. If you do not want the password
dialog box at startup, select the menu item Options > Settings > Startup Options (see
“Startup Options” below).

IFDC Security Protection on I/A Series Platforms

The security concept for IFDC is based on the I/A Series security concept. The standard
I/A Series system provides security access privilege through configuration of environments. These
environments provide security on a per application basis providing the plant with controlled
access to these environments. These environments are password protected and configured by the
user.
At startup, IFDC checks the access level settings from the FoxView/Display Manager access lock
information. FoxView sets a string variable named <dmname>ACL (length = 255) to reflect the
current state of the FoxView access lock information. <dmname> stands for the name of the
Display Manager. This string variable is only set by FoxView, not by the Display Manager. If you
use the Display Manager and need that variable to be set, you must set it in the respective
environment.

32
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

In a configuration file named IFDC_Security, the system engineer should define a mapping
between the FoxView access lock information and the IFDC access levels. For each IFDC access
level (Configuration, Calibration, Test), the engineer can define a mapping. The Workshop access
level is not applicable as an IFDC startup option. Configuration is the highest access level to enter
IFDC on an I/A Series station.
The file is located under /opt/fox/ciocfg/ifdenv. If this file does not exit, IFDC always starts with
the access level Configuration.
An example of the contents of the IFDC_Security file follows:
###############
Configuration 4
Calibration 5
Test 6
###############
Starting with the highest access level (Configuration), IFDC checks if this level is enabled. If this
level is enabled, IFDC comes up with the enabled access level. If the access level is not enabled,
IFDC checks the next access level mapping. If none of the access levels are enabled, IFDC starts
with access level None.
The access lock mapping for the different IFDC access levels can be set to a value in the range of
0 to 255. If the access level gets the lock information 0, it is unprotected/enabled.
Example:
♦ If Configuration has the value 0, IFDC always starts with the Configuration access
level.
♦ If Calibration has the value 0, IFDC always starts with the Calibration access level, if
Configuration is not enabled.
Mapping between the FoxView access lock information and the IFDC access levels:
User Access Level Setting IFDC Access Level
(FoxView/DM Mapping in IFDC Startup Access
Environment Script) IFDC_Security Level
don’t care Configuration 0 Configuration
(unprotected)
setacl 4 + (access level 4 unprotected) Configuration 4 (protected) Configuration
-> <dmname>ACL is set to 000000
setacl 4 - (access level 4 protected) Configuration 4 (protected) Configuration not enabled
-> <dmname>ACL is set to 000100 Calibration 5 (protected) Calibration enabled

Startup Options
See Figure 6. This tab enables users with the Workshop password to:
♦ Start the program always off-line or on-line
♦ Ask the user for a password or not during startup
♦ Select the security level for startup.

33
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Figure 6. Sample Startup Options Screen

Initial Settings using the INI File

Many Microsoft Windows based programs use an INI file to store initial settings of the program.
IFDC/PC20 also uses the INI file to store some initial settings. This file is also used to store user
and/or PC specific settings.
The name of the file is foxifdc.INI. It is located in the system directory C:\WINNT for a station
with the Windows NT or Window 2000 operating system or C:\Windows on a station with
Windows 95 or Windows XP. On a Solaris station, the initialization file has the path and
filename: /.foxifdc.ini.
It may be edited with a normal text editor (for example, Notepad on PC or vi on Solaris).
The foxifdc.INI file may have three different sections: [Settings], [Directories] and [Recent
File List].
In the [Directories] section after the keyword “ADT Path=”, specify the pathname where
IFDC/PC20 should store the audit trail files. If this entry is in the foxifdc.ini file, IFDC/PC20
generates an audit trail file in the specified path when parameters are written to the device. See
“Audit Trail Tab” on page 27 for more details.
Example for Windows: [Directories]
ADT Path= C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\data
Example for Solaris: [Directories]
ADT Path= /temp/

34
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

The following entries influence the behavior of the communications via FoxCom modem (for
PC20 only):
In the [Settings] section, the following entries influence the behavior of the communications.
Do not change any of the other entries which are entered by the program itself. The displayed
values below are the default times and are in effect when no entry is in the foxifdc.ini file. The “x”
values are internal times and not equivalent to seconds. The PC hardware, operating system,
connected device, protocol, modem, barriers, cable lengths, and so forth can influence the
settings. The manual entries must match exactly (wording and spaces) as described below.

! CAUTION
There can be many reasons why PC20 may not communicate with a functional
device. You may not have a sufficient loop load, the modem could be defective, the
cable is attached to the wrong place on the loop wiring, the device you are trying to
communicate with is not a FoxCom Intelligent Device, and so forth. Therefore, this
section only applies if: 1) the communication problem is intermittent - PC20 works
OK sometimes and sometimes you get messages such as “Error in Sending a Read
Request”, or 2) there are no problems communicating to a device in the maintenance
shop, but the same computer has communication problems on similar devices
installed in the field, or 3) When trying to communicate with a device, both LEDs
light up on the modem but you cannot establish communications.

A) For automatic Workshop Environment:

Entry to be typed in the [Settings] x for x for

section Windows 95 Windows NT
Start with fast (workshop) 1 1
communication=x

Meaning:
PC20 will always start with fast communication switched on. Do not include this entry
on PCs that are used to configure devices that are digitally connected to I/A Series FBMs.
This will cause communication errors.
B) Communication problems in Workshop Environment using FoxCom protocol:

Entries to be typed in the [Settings] x for x for

section Windows 95 Windows NT
gapTime.FoxCom.WS=x 14 14
receiveTime.FoxCom.WS=x 20 20
delayTime.FoxCom.WS=x 2 2
waitTime.FoxCom.WS=x 20 20

35
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Meaning:
These are the default values depending upon the computer used with PC20. Changing
the “x” values per the instruction below can greatly reduce communication failures when
PC20 is configured for the Workshop Environment and communicates with FoxCom
devices.
If you receive a lot of communication errors with the workshop environment turned on,
increase the gapTime by one or two digits and check for communication errors. If you still
have communication problems, increase the waitTime by one or two digits and check for
communication errors. The waitTime must always be larger than the gapTime. If you still
have communication errors, repeat steps by increasing the gapTime and then the
waitTime.
C) Communication problems with devices digitally integrated to an I/A Series system using
FoxCom protocol:

Entries to be typed in the [Settings] x for x for

section Windows 95 Windows NT
gapTime.FoxCom.IA=x 14 14
receiveTime.FoxCom.IA=x 20 20
delayTime.FoxCom.IA=x 300 300
waitTime.FoxCom.IA=x 300 300

Meaning:
These are the default values depending upon the computer used with PC20. Changing
the “x” values per the instruction below can eliminate communication failures when PC20
is communicating to a device digitally integrated to an I/A Series system through a FBM.
If you get a lot of communication errors when connected in parallel to the I/A Series
FBM, you may get better results by changing the gapTime (either increase or decrease the
gapTime) by one or two digits. If you still have communication failures, change the
gapTime again in the same direction. If you still have communication errors, change the
gapTime to the other side of the default setting by one or two digits.
If the computer is used in both the stand-alone situation and with transmitters digitally
integrated to an I/A Series system, you can modify the setting directory, if necessary, for
both situations per B and C above. Then, whenever PC20 is being used in the stand-alone
situation, manually start the fast communications by selecting File > Workshop
Environment. But do not modify the Settings section to automatically start the
Workshop Environment per A above, because you will get communication errors when
attached to a device digitally integrated to an I/A Series system.

36
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Beginning a New Configuration Database

To begin a new configuration database without a connection to a device, select New from the File
menu. The IFDC/PC20 presents the New dialog box. This selection dialog box shows in a tree
view all the supported protocols and devices (see Figure 7). Select the device with which you wish
to work. If a device supports multiple model codes, a secondary model selection screen (see
Figure 8) is displayed. Select the model with which you wish to work. The IFDC/PC20 then
presents the device top level menu screen for the device and the configuration pages for the model
you selected.
The displayed default values in the Configuration pages are stored in the Default database files.
The default database files are stored in the subdirectory tables under the installation path (for
example, C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\Tables). It is possible to change these default values
for the preconfiguration of a device. To get new default values do a preconfiguration of a device or
connect to a device with the desired parameter settings and select Options > Save as Default.
This function stores the selected device database as the default database.

Figure 7. Device Type Selection Dialog Box

37
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Figure 8. Model Selection Dialog Box

Device Selection and File Operations

A major difference between the IFDC I/A Series configuration and the PC20 configuration is the
selection of devices and directories. With the PC20, connections are made to whatever device is
on the wire. In the I/A Series configuration case, you must select the device. See Figure 9.
A more important distinction is for file operations. In the stand-alone case, file operations use
standard Windows File menu Open and Save operations, using the standard file browsing
dialog boxes. When connected to an I/A Series system, file operations are hard wired to specific
directories for each device. Thus, the selection for the directory to save to, and the name of the
file, is indirectly done by selecting a device from the available device list.
The following table describes the various file operations and their behaviors.

File Menu PC20 IFDC

New... Displays Device List. Displays Device List.
Brings up Configuration sheet. Brings up Configuration sheet.
Open ... Brings up the standard Windows Brings up the Device Select dialog box. The file
Open dialog box to open any select database specifies the directory where the
database file. file is located. The selected device block name is
used as the filename.
New... if the configuration file does not exist in
the appropriate spot in the file system.

38
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

File Menu PC20 IFDC

Close Checks internal copy of the device Checks IFDC internal copy of the device
parameters. If there are no changes, parameters. If no changes, immediately closes the
immediately closes the connection. connection. Otherwise, asks if you wish to Save
Otherwise, asks if you wish to Save to Device.
to Device...
Save Saves all parameters to the existing If compound and block names are known, saves
filename. If saving a the file.
preconfiguration database, use Otherwise, drop into Save As...
Save As...
Save As ... Saves the file to a different location Use Select Device... dialog box to find the
or filename. The most popular device associated with the database. Use the
filename is the user tag number. directory path specified for the device and use the
block name as the filename.
Connect to Establishes communication to the Brings up the Device Select dialog box. Then
Device device connected to the modem. connects to the selected device.
Save to If connected to a device, saves the If connected to a device, saves the configuration
Device new configuration information to information.
the connected device. Otherwise, Otherwise, not available.
not available.
Upload If connected to a device, restarts If connected to a device, restarts uploading the
Database uploading the configuration configuration database from the device again.
from Device database from the device again.

39
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Figure 9. IFDC Device Selection Screen

The IFDC Device Selection screen as shown in Figure 9 displays the tag number of the device in
parenthesis after the block name of the I/O channel. The tag number is a device parameter and
stored in the device.
After pressing the Refresh button in the Device Selection screen, select the Control Stations in the
next dialog box for which the displayed information should be refreshed. After the selection of
one or more Control Stations, the IAUtil program initializes and creates the displayed tree
information for the selected stations. The program uses the CSA and Object Manager services to
retrieve the information about the blocks (compound and block name and tag number). Only
I/O channels and blocks allowing connection of Intelligent Field Devices supported by IFDC
(only certain ECB types) are filtered out. If a device is or was connected to the channel, the
program retrieves the tag number from the corresponding ECB block via the Object Manager.
The update of the tag number is only possible for FoxCom devices because those devices are
supported by ECBs which hold the tag number information. For the HART devices, the ECB201
and ECB202 are used. This block does not hold the tag number and therefore CSA and Object
Manager cannot retrieve the tag number. This means that during this initialization process only
the tag numbers of FoxCom field devices are displayed. The other channels where HART devices
are connected or preconfiguration (off-line) device databases are stored are marked as
UNKNOWN.

40
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

The tag number of the device is updated in the displayed tree of the Device Selection screen
through the following actions:
♦ After selecting the Refresh button as described above.
♦ After IFDC is connected with a device, IFDC retrieves the tag number from the
device and updates the tree information for the Device Selection screen.
♦ After selecting File > Save or Save As in IFDC to store the field device database at a
selected I/O channel, the tag number for the chosen channel is updated in the tree
information of the Device Selection Screen. If the Save or Save As action is done
from a Pre-Configuration window where no device is connected the tag number is
marked at the end with an asterisk “*”. A Pre-Configuration window is opened using
File > Open or New.
NOTE
After system configuration changes (for example, after adding new Control
Stations, FBMs and corresponding ECBs) the tree information within the Device
Selection dialog boxes needs to be updated by selecting the Refresh button to make
these ECBs visible in the Device Selection screen. But the Refresh button should
only be used for new Control Stations because this function re initializes the tag
number information and marks HART devices or preconfiguration (off-line) device
databases as UNKNOWN.

Since some devices can only be associated with certain ECB types, the Device Selection dialog box
supports the concept of filtering out invalid entries.
For ease of use, a search capability is provided in the Device Selection dialog box. When you type
in a search string and press the Find button, the selection tree is searched for matching substrings.
Once a substring is found, the specified tree item is selected and displayed. If the item is a parent
item, it is expanded. Subsequent button presses on Find iterate to the next matching item.

IFDC Operation on Solaris with “windows off”

IFDC runs correctly on Solaris stations with “windows off ”. However, the Edit > Configure
dialog tabs are inactive. Clicking the mouse on these tabs has no effect. In order to bring up the
next configuration page, press the CTRL and TAB keys simultaneously. Note that this keyboard
shortcut also works with “windows on”. This keyboard shortcut does not work if IFDC is running
on the secondary display in a dual-display system.

Preconfiguring a Device
The IFDC/PC20 enables you to preconfigure a device and save the configuration in your
database for later downloading to a device. You can do this by beginning a new file (New in the
File menu) or opening an existing file (Open in the File menu). When you begin a new file, you
access a default database of the selected type of device. When you open an existing file, you access
the database of a specific device which has been previously saved to this data directory. In either
case, you can modify the database and then save it with the Save As function in the File menu.
You can also (then or later) download the database to a device. To send a database to a device, the

41
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

database must be first saved to a file. Then you must connect to the device and select File and
Open and then select the proper override.

Connecting to a Device
To connect to a device, first hardwire your device. For PC20, if this is done prior to startup, the
configurator automatically connects to the device upon startup; if the device is connected after
startup, select Connect to Device in the File menu. For IFDC, you must specify the device via
the Device Select dialog box.
The IFDC/PC20 presents the Device Data screen (see Figure 11) and device top level menu
(Figure 11) for the connected device. Also displayed is the device toolbar, which enables you to go
to the configuration, various calibration, or status functions directly. These functions vary with
each device. See Figure 10.

CONFIGURATION STATUS
POINT CALIBRATION REZERO
RERANGE
Figure 10. Sample Device Toolbar

Device Top Level Menu Screen

The device top level menu screen, shown in Figure 11, is displayed when connected to a device or
when preconfiguration data is loaded onto a window. This screen also has pull-down menus for
selecting the various functions. Explanations of the menus and functions that are common to
most types of devices appear in Table 4.

42
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure 11. Sample Device Top Level Menu and Data Screen

43
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Table 4. Device Top Level Menu – Description of Functions

Top Level
Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description
File New Ctrl+N Creates a preconfiguration database using a default database
as a template.
Open Ctrl+O Edits an existing configuration database.
Close Closes the current configuration field.
Save Ctrl+S Saves the active document.
Save As... Saves the configuration to a file.
Import Imports the ASCII files generated by IFDC/PC20. See
page 49.
Export Writes all the device parameters to an ASCII file which then
can be imported into other programs. See page 49.
Connect to Device Connects to a device directly or using I/A Series Pass-
Through. See page 42.
Save To Device Transfers configuration database to a device.
Workshop Enables faster communication with optimized timing.
Environment
Print... Ctrl+P Prints the active document.
Print Preview Displays full pages.
Print Setup... Changes the printer and printing options.
Print Font Changes the print font.
Print Full Database Specifies printing the full database.
(File Names) Shows most recently accessed files for quick access.
Exit Quits the application; prompts to save documents.
Edit Configure... Edits the configuration database.
Compare... Against Database - Compares the current configuration
against a stored database. See page 51.
Against Device - Compares the current configuration against
the values in the device. See page 51.
Comments... Allows you to view/edit comments regarding your
device/configuration. The comments are stored in the
database file only. They are not stored in the device.
See page 52.

44
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 4. Device Top Level Menu – Description of Functions (Continued)

Top Level
Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description
View Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar. See page 24.
Device Toolbar Enables you to go to the configuration, various calibration, or
status functions directly. See page 42.
Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar. See page 25.
Info Window Shows device characteristic, audit trail, and error trace
information. See page 26.
Progress Shows progress of an upload or download operation.
Trend Displays a trend. See page 46.
Calibrate (Options vary with type ---
of device)
Test Device Status Displays status and diagnostic information from the device.
See page 52.
Set mA/Pulse Output If configured to 4-20 mA output, sets output to a specific mA
value to test other devices in the loop. See page 54.
Set Digital Output If configured to Digital output, sets output to a specific
digital value to test I/A Series system wiring and displays.
See page 55.
Display Raw Input Displays raw inputs for some types of device. See page 55.
Go Off-line Places the device in Off-line mode. See page 56.
Go On-Line Places the device in On-line mode. See page 56.
(Other options vary with - - -
type of device)
Utilities FOX FLOW Executes the FoxFlow application.
CON VALVE Executes the ConValve application.
FOX DOC Executes the FoxDoc application.
User MS Word Executes MS Word.
MS Excel Executes MS Excel.
Run ... Runs any program.
(User Application 1) Launches a user-specified application.
(User Application 2) Launches a user-specified application.
(User Application n) Launches a user-specified application.
Options Settings Modifies application settings. See page 30.
User ... Defines up to nine user applications to add to User menu.
Save as Default Saves the current configuration as the default template for
File > New.
Change Security Level Provides password access.

45
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Table 4. Device Top Level Menu – Description of Functions (Continued)

Top Level
Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description
Window New window Opens another window for the active document.
Cascade Arranges windows so they overlap.
Tile Arranges windows as nonoverlapping tiles.
Arrange icons Arranges icons at the bottom of the window.
Help Index Lists Help topics.
Using Help Displays instructions about how to use Help.
About Displays the software version number of the configurator.

Workshop Environment
Workshop Environment enables faster communication with optimized timing. It is accessed via
the File menu from the device top level menu. Do not use this function when the PC20 is
connected in parallel to another configurator or to an I/A Series FBM. If you have
communication problems while using this function, switch it off by selecting the menu item
again.

Trend Dialog Box

Trend dialog box is accessed via the View menu from the device top level menu.
The Trend dialog box displays important measurement data of a device. The measurement data
are dynamically retrieved from the device and displayed. The trending is only active as long as this
dialog is displayed and the Monitor checkbox is checked. The trend dialog box is resizeable.

Save Trend Data

With Save Data it is possible to store the measured trending data collected since the trend dialog
box is displayed and the Monitor checkbox is checked. You are asked for the path and filename to
store the trending database. This file could be displayed at later time by using the Load Data
button.

Load Trend Data

With Load Data it is possible to retrieve the stored trending database. You are asked for the path
and filename to retrieve the trending database. The file must be written using Save Data.

Clear Trend Data

With Clear Data it is possible to delete all the collected trending data until this point and start
trending with a new database. The previously collected trending data is lost unless it is stored for
later use by using Save Data.

46
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Print Trend Data

With Print the displayed portion of the trending view can be printed. Before this step, it is
possible to choose the portion of the trend data which you want to display and print by using the
functions to Manipulate the Scales or to Manipulate the Trend.

Monitor Trend Data

With the Monitor check box being checked, the dynamically retrieved data are collected within
the trend dialog box and displayed. If this box is unchecked, the collection of the measurement
data is switched off.

Export Trend Data

With Export Data it is possible to store the measured trending data collected since the Trend
dialog box is displayed and the Monitor checkbox is checked into an ASCII text file. You are
asked for the path and filename to store the trending database. The default filename is composed
of the Tag Number + _TRD.txt. However, you can choose any other name.
The trend file has a header part and the trend data part with the curve values. The header part
contains information such as the tagname, number of curves as well as ranges and descriptions of
the curves. The trend data part lists in each line the measured values for each curve. Each
measurement shows the sequence number, date (Month/Day/Year) and time
(Hour:Minutes:Seconds.Milliseconds) of measurement and the values for each curve. To import
the trend data into other programs, select the appropriate ASCII import function within the other
program.

Example for Microsoft Excel

In Microsoft Excel, choose File > Open. For the file type, select Text Files to list all files and
select the desired file with the ending _TRD.txt. The Excel Import Assistant will guide you
through the definition of the import format:
Start the import with the headings for the curves (line number 13).
The fields are separated by tabs.
Select General for all columns.
Import the file.
It is now possible to use the Excel functions and store this file in the Excel format.
The imported information will be displayed in several columns. For each measurement you have a
row. The first column contains the measurement number followed by the date and time.
Beginning with the fourth column the measured curve values are displayed.

Example for Microsoft Access

In Microsoft Access, open your database. Choose File > External Data > Import. For the file
type, select Text File and select the desired file with the ending _TRD.txt. The Access Import
Assistant guides you through the definition of the import format:
The fields are separated by tabs.

47
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Import the file.

The imported information is displayed in several columns. For each measurement you have a row.
The first column contains the measurement number followed by the date and time. Beginning
with the fourth column, the measured curve values are displayed.

Save as Default
Save as Default saves the current configuration as the default template for File > New. The
default templates are stored in the subdirectory tables:
C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC\tables
If you changed the default template of a device and you want to restore the initial default
template, copy the appropriate template file of a device with the extension DAT from the directory
C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC. The template files are composed of the following strings:
def + device type + _H (for HART only) and the extension DAT.

Reading Device Data

When the IFDC/PC20 is connected to a device via File > Connect to Device, the device top
level menu and Device Data screen is presented. This screen identifies the device and
continuously reads and displays measurement information from the device, as shown in
Figure 11. Measurements are updated approximately once every two seconds. The display also
shows additional information as follows:
♦ Measurement values are displayed in red if the specific measurement is out of range or
the device reports an alarm for this measurement.
♦ Measurement values are displayed in cyan if the value is not secure (not current) and
the last retrieved value is displayed. All measured values are cyan if there are
communication problems.
♦ Measurements are replaced by asterisks (*) if a communication error occurs during
initialization or reinstallation steps.
♦ Dashes indicate off-line status.
♦ Number signs indicate that these is an invalid measurement.

Downloading Database Information to a Device

! CAUTION
Before using this function, it is highly recommended that you save the existing device
data in your database. Since the factory does not maintain the databases on every
device shipped, overwriting the original coefficients with different values can result in
permanent loss of the accuracy and repeatability resulting from factory calibration.

To download working database information to a device:

1. Hardwire your device to the FBM or Fieldbus (for IFDC) or to the modem, FBM,
and/or optional power supply unit (for PC20).
2. Access Connect to Device via the File menu.

48
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

3. Open the desired file via File > Open.

4. Select one of the override choices.
5. Respond Yes when asked if you want to download the database to the device.

ASCII Format for Import and Export

The IFDC/PC20 ASCII format file contains two sections:
♦ File header
♦ Parameter list.

File Header
The file header identifies:
♦ The version of the file format
♦ The device type
♦ The major and minor revision level of the firmware of the documented device
♦ The database type (normally the database type is 0 for import or export files)
♦ The date and time of creation of the file
♦ Comments. (comments can be added to the IFDC/PC20 database by accessing the
menu item Edit > Comment).

Parameter List
The Parameter List starts with BEGIN_INPUT, and ends with END_INPUT.
There is one parameter per line. The description includes the name of the parameter and then its
value. The two items are separated by a comma.
The name of a parameter is a short key identifier string. The name is unique for one device.
The value of a parameter is written as ASCII strings. Strings are not surrounded by quotation
marks (“or”). The string starts after the comma and ends at the end of the line or at the beginning
of a comment.

Comments
The comment starts with the string ,/* (comma, slash, asterisk). Everything between this string
until the end of the line belongs to the comment.

IFDC/PC20 Export - Format

The IFDC/PC20 Export function contains all parameter/value pairs of a device. Do not rely on
any order (sorting) of the parameters.
During the Export function, each parameter/value pair is followed by a comment which describes
the parameter.
You can choose any filename for the export file.

49
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

IFDC/PC20 Import - Format

An ASCII file which is imported by IFDC/PC20 does not need to have a certain filename. The
format of the file, however, needs to have the structure described above.
To import an ASCII file you need to open a device database or connect to a device of the same
type.
The import file does not need to contain all parameters of a device. It is possible to import only
certain parameters. The parameters are identified by their names. The parameters do not need to
have a specific order (sorting).
For the import, the comment part describing the parameter in each line is not needed. But it is
possible to add comments at any place.
NOTE
Use the import function only with files generated by IFDC/PC20 for the same
device. Do not change the exported files. The import function does not check and
validate the consistency of any parameter. Changing an exported file and
downloading this parameter to a device may damage the device configuration.

Example of the IFDC/PC20 - ASCII Format

An example of the format follows:
//* Foxboro Corporation
//* IFDC/PC20
File Version: 5
Transmitter Type (converted) / Subtype: 16 / 10
Firmware Major Revision: 0
Firmware Minor Revision: 5
Database Type: 2
Date: 02/08/2000 14:00
Comment:
,/*
BEGIN_INPUT,
TAGNME, Level Device ,/*Tag Descriptor
LOCATE, Location 1 ,/*Geo Location
SENPLT, (0a) 144LVD,/*Sensor Type Code
SENTYP, 25 ,/*Transmitter Type #
TAGNMB, 144LVD ,/*Tag
MANUFID, (3f) Foxboro Eckardt,/*Manufacture ID
HDWRREV, 03 ,/*Hard Rev
DEVID, 9300361,/*Device ID Number
TAGDATE, 09/22/1999,/*Tag Date
..........................
END_INPUT,

Configuration Function
The Configuration function allows editing of the device database. This function is accessed via
the Edit menu from the device top level menu or from the device toolbar. The Configure menu
contains those configurable parameters applicable to a specific product. Therefore, the menu
differs from product to product. Information on each configuration operation and how to
accomplish the configuration is given in the appropriate product appendix.

50
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Compare Function
The Compare function allows you to compare values of various device parameters in the working
database with those in the device or those in a stored database file. The Compare function is
accessed via the Edit menu from the device top level menu. A sample of a compare screen is
shown in Figure 12. All parameters, whose values are different, are highlighted.

Figure 12. Sample Compare Screen

The Compare function may be used as shown in Table 5.

Table 5. Compare Function Possibilities

Compare Compare
Active Database/Device Connection Status Against File Against Device
Preconfiguration file open only. No device connected. Yes No
Connected device uploaded database, edited or unedited device Yes Yes
connected.
Preconfiguration file open and device connected (same type). Yes No
Existing database on file opened and device connected. Yes No

51
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Comments Function
The Comments function allows you to record comments regarding your device/configuration.
You can use it to add comments to the data file, view comments already written, or copy the
comments to another data file. The Comments function is accessed via the Edit menu from the
device top level menu. The Add Comments screen is shown in Figure 13.
NOTE
Comments are stored in the IFDC/PC20 database file and are not stored in the
device’s memory.

Figure 13. Comments Screen

Calibration Function
The Calibration function is accessed via the Calibrate menu from the device top level menu. The
Calibrate menu contains those calibration operations applicable to the specific device you are
calibrating. Therefore, it differs from product to product. Information on each calibration
operation and how to accomplish it is given in the appropriate product appendix.

Field Device Status Function

The Field Device Status function interrogates the connected device and displays Pass-Fail status
messages on the Primary and Secondary Status Fields and an alphanumeric indication of any
diagnostic errors. The function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu. A
sample Field Device Status screen is shown in Figure 14.

52
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure 14. Sample Field Device Status Screen

The Field Device Status screen is only applicable to the specific product to which you are
connected. Therefore, it differs from product to product. The list of device status messages, their
explanations, and recommended actions are given in the appropriate product appendix.
Selecting Codes at the bottom of the display causes the various diagnostic codes to be displayed
in decimal and hex form with no text translation. A sample Diagnostic Codes screen is shown in
Figure 15.

Figure 15. Sample Diagnostic Codes Screen

53
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

The Diagnostic Codes list shown is only applicable to the specific product to which you are
connected. Therefore, it differs from product to product. The list of device diagnostic error codes,
their explanations, and recommended actions are given in the appropriate product appendix.

Set Update Time Function

In PC20, this function allows you to modify the dynamic measurement scan time. Per default, the
sleep time between dynamic measurement cycles (T1s) is 2000 ms. The resulting cycle time (T1c)
is the sum of the sleep time (T1s) plus the retrieve time to retrieve the dynamic measurement
values (T1r). Therefore, T1c = T1s + T1r. The retrieve time (T1r) depends on the protocol and
the number of retrieved values. The sleep time (T1s) can be changed with this function. For some
devices, there is a secondary measurement cycle (as a multiple of the first primary cycle) in which
the values, which do not change so frequently, are collected. For example, in the SRD991, the
measurement of the internal temperature, cycle count, and travel sum is in this second cycle. The
multiplication factor (Y) for this cycle can also be changed. The resulting secondary cycle time
(T2c) depends on the primary cycle and the retrieve time (T2r) for the secondary values.
Therefore, T2c = Y (T1c) + T2r.
NOTE
This function is only allowed in the workshop/workbench environment. Do not
change these parameters if PC20 is connected to a device in parallel to the FBM.

Set mA/Pulse Output Function (Loop Cal)

When Output is configured 4-20 mA, certain devices can be set to output a mA value to test or
adjust other devices in the loop. The Set mA/Pulse Output function is accessed via the Test menu
from the device top level menu. To set the mA output, first select the output units (in mA,
measurement units, or %) and then enter the desired output value. The Set mA/Pulse screen
(Figure 16) shows the allowable output range and units.
If you are using a CFT10 or CFT15 transmitter, you can select to set either the mA or pulse
output to a desired value.

54
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure 16. Sample Set mA/Pulse Screen

Set Digital Output Function

When a device is configured for FoxCom Digital Output, certain devices can be set to output a
digital value to test I/A Series system wiring and displays. (I/A Series Version 4.0 or later is
required.) Both Measurement #1 and Measurement #2 outputs can be set. The Set Digital
Output function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu. First, select the
measurement and then enter the desired output value.

Display Raw Input Function

This function reads the raw inputs for certain devices. The Display Raw Input function is
accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu. The inputs displayed for various
devices are shown in Table 6.

Table 6. Raw Inputs Displayed for Various Devices

Device Type Display

820 Frequency of Input 1 (pressure input)
Frequency of Input 2 (temperature input)
860 mV Input 1 (pressure input)
mV Input 2 (temperature input)
I/A Series mV Input 1 (pressure input)
Pressure mV Input 2 (temperature input)
CFT10 Tube Drive Frequency
CFT15 Tube Drive Frequency

55
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Table 6. Raw Inputs Displayed for Various Devices (Continued)

Device Type Display

83 Shedding Frequency
Upper Limit Frequency
IMT25 Electrode Voltage (Positive)
Electrode Voltage (Negative)
Coil Current (Positive)
Coil Current (Negative)
IMT96 FlowB ADC counts compensated for offsets
Voltage reference in ADC counts for offsets
Actual gain calculation
Zero flow offset
130 Pressure input (in percent)
140 Pressure input (in percent)

Go On-Line Function
All functions normally return to on-line status unless the device was disconnected during
operation. However, this function enables you to force the device back to on-line mode if
necessary. The Go On-Line function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level
menu.

Go Off-Line Function
Normally, the device should remain on-line. However, this function enables you to force the
device off-line if necessary. The Go Off-line function is accessed via the Test menu from the
device top level menu.

Help Function
Help Menu
In the Help menu you can choose to display a list of Help topics (Index), display overview
instructions IFDC/PC20 (Using Help), or display the version number of the configurator
(About). If you choose Index, you can select information on a specific menu. To search for a topic
or choose from the list of available topics, select the Index tab from this screen (see Figure 17). To
search for a word or phrase that may be contained in a Help topic, select the Find tab from this
screen.

Help Via the Toolbar

The “?” icon on the toolbar provides an easy way of accessing the About Help described above.
The “È?” icon can be used to get information on the subject you designate with the indicator.
To do this:
1. Click on the “È?” icon.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the area in which you want Help.

56
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

3. Click again to display the Help message for that particular item.

Help Via the F1 Function Key

Help is also available on any subject identified by the placement of your cursor when pressing the
F1 function key.

Figure 17. Help Topics Index Screen - Index Tab

Previewing or Printing a Device Database Report

This function permits you to preview a device database report or output it to a printer. To
perform this function, first access the data by connecting to the device or accessing the database
via Open in the File menu. Then use the Print Preview or Print option in the File menu. To
preview or print the full database rather than just the configuration parameters, specify Print Full
Database in the File menu prior to specifying Print Preview or Print.

57
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

IFDC Printing on Station with Solaris Operating System

Print Setup
The I/A Series system is shipped with a default WIND/U® file which is read by WIND/U
applications. This file is used to store printer settings as well as other user preferences. The default
print settings must be supplied to the WIND/U XPrinter application before any WIND/U
application can use Print Preview or perform any printing. Therefore, you must invoke the
application’s Print Setup to provide the default printer information before any printing can be
done.
To invoke the application Print Setup:
1. Click File > Print Setup and select the Properties button.
The dialog box which appears has a button on the bottom labeled Install....
Click on Install....
A dialog box appears where you can add or delete printers. Note that the first time this
dialog box appears, there are no configured printers.
2. Click on Add Printer.
A dialog box displays all valid printer types and all currently configured ports. The
first time this dialog box is invoked, the only port is FILE:.
3. Click on Define New Port.
4. In the dialog box, select Spooler to let XPrinter go out and supply all configured
printers on your system.
This dialog box allows you to click on a port and edit the print command supplied if
you wish to do so.
5. Dismiss this dialog box.
Notice that all the printer ports now appear in the Add Printer dialog box.
6. Click on a port, then scroll down and select the appropriate printer type from the long
list on the left. Note that only PostScript® and PCL™ printers are available.
7. Select the printer type, click on Add Selected to provide that printer in the actual
Print dialog box application.
8. Dismiss this dialog box and the Printer Installation dialog box.
9. In the Printer Setup dialog box, click Save.
10. You must select the correct printer type. If the type of printer you have does not
appear in the printer type list, try Generic PostScript Printer. If that does not work,
you must install the printer-specific description file. Printer description files (PPD
files) are available from the printer manufacturer, and some printer manufacturers
allow the printer description files to be downloaded from their web page. For
example, Hewlett-Packard™ provides all their printer description files on their
Customer Service web page, http://www.hp.com/cposupport/eschrome.html.
11. Select Printers from the pull-down menu, click on Next and follow the directions
provided on the screen.

58
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

The Windows version of the PPD file is the correct one. Adobe also provides a
number of printer description files for a number of different printers
(http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/printerdrivers/installwinppd.html).
To install a new printer PPD file:
1. Exit any running IFDC, FoxDraw, or I/A Series SFC application.
2. Rename the PPD file. The PPD filename must be lowercase. For example,
HP1600C1.PPD must be renamed hp1600c1.ppd.
3. Change the file extension. If the printer is a PostScript printer, the filename must be
<filename>.ps. If the printer is a PCL printer, the filename must be
<file-name>.pcl.
4. Install the file in the /opt/windu/xprinter/ppds/ directory.
Once the new printer driver file is installed, XPrinter reads the file and the Print Setup
Printer Type list now includes the new printer type.

Print Font
This selection allows you to select the print font and font size. The first time Print Font is entered,
the default font size may be blank or have an invalid numeric value. Select the desired font and
size.

Print Preview
When the station is connected to a device or is used to preconfigure a device, a device database
report is available. Print Preview provides a window which displays what the actual printed
report looks like.
The one item to note in Print Preview is that the font size, if set too big, causes only part of the
report to be visible on a given page. If the selected font size is the smallest size provided for the
selected font, then the only way to scale the font further is to invoke Print Setup and set the Scale
to a smaller value. For example, if the default font is Times and the font size is 8, a print setup
scale of 0.05 allows a 2-column report per page.

IFDC Printing on Station with Windows Operating System

Due to the nature of the Windows operating system, a printer connected to the I/A Series
Nodebus via a communications processor is not accessible from Windows applications.
Therefore, to print IFDC database reports, the Windows based station must have a printer
connected directly to the Windows based station parallel port, and this must be the printer used.
Another option is to print the IFDC database reports to a file, then transfer the report file to a
diskette and take it to a Windows PC which has a printer directly connected, and print the report
file on that PC.

59
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Profibus Configuration (PC20 only)

For Profibus devices, the File > Connect to Device does not work the first time. Before it is
possible to connect to a Profibus slave device, it is necessary to go though the following steps:
♦ Define the Profibus Master parameters in the Masters page.
♦ Define the Profibus Slaves in the Slaves page.
♦ Create a connection to the slave by selecting the Connect button in the Slaves page.
The definitions about the Profibus master and slaves are stored in a file with the extension .PBC.
The Profibus configuration is stored in this file if you press the Save button in the Master page
or press the Connect button in the Slaves page or if you leave the Profibus Configuration dialog
box with the OK button. If you close down PC20 and start it later again, the Profibus
configuration you saved last is used.
It is possible to store different Profibus configurations in different files with the Save button in
the Master page. With the Open button, it is possible to read in another Profibus configuration.
After you created a connection to a Profibus slave by selecting the Connect button in the Slaves
page, the menu selection File > Connect to Device works. It connects to the same slave you
selected last time in the Slaves page. If you want to connect to a different slave on the Profibus
you need to go back to the Slaves page, select the slave and press Connect.

60
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Profibus Master Page

In the Master page, the Profibus parameters for the Profibus master stack must be configured.

Figure 18. Sample Profibus Master Configuration Screen

Table 7. Profibus Master Configuration Screen – Field Descriptions

Input Field Range Unit Description Notes on user input

File Name The field displays the path To change the path and
and filename of the Profibus filename for the Profibus
configuration file. The file has configuration file, press the
the extension .PBC. Save button. The File dialog
box is displayed and allows
you to change the path and
filename. Or with the Open
button another Profibus
configuration file can be
selected.

61
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Table 7. Profibus Master Configuration Screen – Field Descriptions (Continued)

Input Field Range Unit Description Notes on user input

Station 1...126 Address of the Profibus The user must engineer this
Address Master bus parameter.
Station Name of the Profibus The user must engineer this
Name Master bus parameter.
Baud rate 9.6 KBaud, Baud rate of the Profibus The user selects the Baud rate
19.2 KBaud, Segment in the combo box
93.75 KBaud, (Note 1).
187.5 KBaud,
500 KBaud,
1.5 MBaud,
3 MBaud,
6 MBaud,
12 MBaud,
45.45 KBaud
Slot time 37... Tbit The Slot time specifies the The user must engineer this
16383 (Note 2) maximum time the master bus parameter.
waits for a transaction The value is depending on the
response. baud rate (Note 3).
Min. 11...1023 Tbit The min. station delay The user must engineer this
Station response time defines the bus parameter.
Delay minimum time to wait before
generating a reply frame.
Max. 35...1023 Tbit The max. station delay The user must engineer this
Station response time defines the bus parameter.
Delay maximum time to wait before
generating a reply frame.
Setup time 1...279 Tbit The Setup Time defines the The user must engineer this
time between an event (for bus parameter.
example, timer interrupt) and
the necessary reaction (for
example, enabling receiver).
Quiet Time 0...127 Tbit The Quiet Time specifies the The user must engineer this
time a transmitting station bus parameter.
must wait after the end of a
frame before enabling its
receiver.
Target 256... Tbit The Target rotation time The user must engineer this
Rotation 16777 defines the anticipated time bus parameter (Note 4).
Time 215 for one token round on the
Profibus, including allowances
for high and low priority
transactions, errors and GAP
maintenance.

62
3. Operation MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 7. Profibus Master Configuration Screen – Field Descriptions (Continued)

Input Field Range Unit Description Notes on user input

Gap Update 1...255 The Gap update factor The user must engineer this
Factor specifies the number of token bus parameter.
rounds between GAP
maintenance (update) cycles.
Highest 1...125 Highest slave device address. The user must engineer this
Station bus parameter.
Addr.
Retry Limit 0...7 Max retry limit. The user must engineer this
bus parameter.

NOTE
1. If you press the Calculate button, the system calculates suggestions for those
parameters which depend on the selected baud rate. Of course, you need to adapt
the suggested parameter values to your needs.
2. The unit for the times calculated is TBit (Bit Time), which means a time, based
on one bit to transmit with a certain baud rate; for example, 1 TBit at 12 Mbaud =
1/12,000,000 bit/sec = 83 nsec.
3. Refer to the Profibus Specification: TSL = max (TSL1, TSL2), TSL1 = 2*TTD +
maxTSDR + 11 bit + TSM, TSL2 = 2*TTD + maxTID1 + 11 bit + TSM,
Transmission Delay Time TTD = tTD / tBit.
4. Refer to the Profibus Specification: min TTR = na * (TTC + high TMC) + k *
low TMC + mt + RET TMC, where na: number of master stations; k: estimated
number of low priority message cycles per token rotation; TTC: token cycle time;
TMC: message cycle time, depending on frame lengt;, mt: number of message retry
cycles per token rotation; RET TMC: message retry cycle time.

Profibus Slave Page

In the Profibus Slaves page, you can define all slaves connected to the Profibus master.
For each slave to which you want to connect, define:
♦ The slave address
♦ The name of the slave. The name is only for internal use and helps you identify the
different slaves.

Table 8. Profibus Slave Page – Actions

Action Description
Add To define a new slave, enter the address and name of the
slave device on the right side and press Add. The new
slave is added to the list of slaves in the list box.

63
MI 020-495 – November 2002 3. Operation

Table 8. Profibus Slave Page – Actions (Continued)

Action Description
Modify To modify the information of a slave, select the slave in
the list box, edit the address or name in the edit controls
on the right side and press Modify.
Delete To delete a slave, select the slave in the list box and press
Delete.
Connect To connect to a certain device, select the slave device
with the appropriate slave address in the slave list and
press the Connect button. The program leaves the
configuration dialog box and connects to the selected
device. From now on PC20 will connect to this device
with the menu selection File > Connect to Device. If
you want to connect to a different slave enter the
Profibus Configuration dialog box again and select
another slave.

Figure 19. Sample Profibus Slave Configuration Screen

64
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
For IFDC, check the latest Intelligent Field Device Configurator (IFDC) Release Notes
(B0400QL) for the list of known problems.

IFDC/PC20 Error Messages

If a problem occurs during IFDC/PC20 operation, an error message is usually displayed that can
help you localize the fault and take appropriate action. If this does not work, use the following
general troubleshooting procedure and the flowcharts in Figure 1 or Figure 2:
1. Check the loop wiring and verify that power is present on all devices and that all
devices are connected properly.
2. Check the LEDs on the FoxCom modem to determine the modem status. When the
Listen light is on, the modem is in the receive mode, ready to accept incoming data.
When the IFDC/PC20 attempts to communicate with the device, the modem is in
the Send mode and the Talk light blinks on and off. If the Listen light is not on, make
sure you are set to the correct communication port.
3. To determine whether the problem is a communication failure, a computer failure, or
a device failure, substitute an HHT for the computer and see if the problem persists.
4. If the computer is OK and communication is OK, use the IFDC Test - Diagnostic
functions to check device status. If a FAIL condition is present, take action to correct
that condition.
5. If the device, communication system, and computer are OK, check the IFDC
software. Verify that all files reside in the specified directories. If this does not identify
the problem, try reloading the IFDC software and/or restoring database files from
your backup.
6. If all else fails, contact the Customer Satisfaction Center (CSC) at 1-866-746-6477.
When calling, please have available all pertinent information about your PC
(processor type, speed, RAM, disk size, and so forth), your module software version,
and a description of your problem. It is also helpful if your PC is running IFDC at the
time you call.
7. If Invensys Foxboro service asks you to send a trace file, generate a trace file as
described below and send it to Invensys Foxboro service per e-mail.

Device Status Error Messages

Status error messages, explanations, and recommended actions for various device types are located
in the applicable appendix.

65
MI 020-495 – November 2002 4. Troubleshooting

Device Diagnostic Error Messages

Diagnostic error codes, error messages, and recommended actions for various device types are
located in the applicable appendix.

PC20 Trace Function

PC20 has a trace function which helps Foxboro service locate any problems. After a normal
installation, the trace function is switched off. If you are asked to enable tracing, do the following:
1. Select Start > Run and enter the program name of the registry editor: regedit or
regedt32.
2. Select the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Foxboro\FoxIFDC.
3. Select the entry ITCDEBUG.
4. With the right mouse click you are able to modify the value. Set the value for
ITCDEBUG on 2 (Trace Debug = 2, No Debug = 0).
5. Now start PC20, reproduce the problem, and exit PC20.
PC20 generates a file output.txt in the directory C:\Program Files\Foxboro\FoxIFDC .

IFDC Trace Function

IFDC has a trace function which helps Foxboro service locate any problems. After a normal
installation, the trace function is switched off. If you are asked to enable tracing do the following:
On stations with the Solaris operating system:
1. Open a VT100 window or cmdtool.
2. Move to the IFDC directory:
cd /opt/fox/ciocfg/ifdenv
3. Create a file named IFDC_Trace:
ls -las > IFDC_Trace
On stations with the Windows operating system:
1. Select Start > Programs > Command Prompt.
2. In the command prompt window, move to the IFDC directory:
d:
cd opt\fox\ciocfg\ifdenv
3. Type sh and press the return key to enter a NuTCRACKER™ Korn Shell.
4. Create a file named IFDC_Trace:
ls -las > IFDC_Trace
Invoke IFDC the same way as before. Run IFDC and reproduce any problem you want to trace.
The trace function generates logfiles which are all written into the directory
/opt/fox/ciocfg/ifdenv: ifdc_startup.log, pt_api.log, om_api.log and output.txt
Send these trace files and the IFDC_Trace file to Invensys Foxboro service.

66
4. Troubleshooting MI 020-495 – November 2002

! CAUTION
For the trace function you need enough disk space on the /opt partition to generate
the trace files.

After the trace files are generated, the trace function should be switched off by deleting the file
IFDC_Trace.

67
MI 020-495 – November 2002 4. Troubleshooting

PC20 Fault Analysis of Communication Failures

FoxCom Protocol
This fault analysis Step 1: After launching the program, do you always get a message
is for repeated No “Could not initialize the IFD Modem” followed by a message after
communication clicking the OK button “Unable to establish connection. Either no
failures only. modem or no device on the modem was found.”?

Yes
Fault Corrected.
Step 2: Under the File menu, click on Connect to Device. Do both of
the LEDs on the modem (Talk and Listen) light up at various times
No before you see the messages in Step 1?
Increase voltage or reduce loop
load. Repeat Step 2. Do you still Yes No
No
get the same messages? Is voltage at device Step 3: Under the Options menu, select Settings
Yes field terminals at -IFD Modem Setup and change the COM port.
least 16 V dc? Repeat Step 2. Do both LEDs illuminate?
Is there at least 200 Ω between the
power supply and where the cable Yes No
attaches to the loop wiring? See Note 2.
Replace cable. Are RS-232 cable connections
Yes No at modem and computer tight?
Is there more than Add at least 200 Ω No Yes
No
350 Ω between to loop wiring at No
the device and Yes power supply. Is there continuity in Tighten cable connections. Repeat
where the cable Repeat Step 2. the RS-232 cable? Step 2. Do both LED’s illuminate?
attaches to the loop Do you get the
wiring? same messages? Yes Yes
No Yes No If battery powered PC, turn on the Yes Yes
ac power to computer. Repeat
Move leads to acceptable No Fault See
Step 2. Do both LEDs illuminate?
position. Repeat Step 2. Do Corrected. Note 1
you still get the same No
messages? Do you still get
Repeat Step 3. Do Yes the same messages
Yes both LEDs illuminate? shown in Step 1?
Attach Foxboro HHT to Is voltage at device No Yes No
the cable connections. Yes field terminals at
Can you communicate least 16 V dc? Does other device (mouse,
with the device? Fault Corrected.
etc.) attached to the same
No COM port work correctly? No
Yes No
Fix computer.
Is there continuity on both No Yes
Fix
device leads of power box and
Do you have an optional Foxboro power
power converter? No
supply attached to the modem? See Note 3.
Yes No
Yes Plug converter into 120 V ac
Is there continuity on both Replace No
Is power converter plugged outlet. Repeat Step 2. Do you
leads of cable and mini- box and/or
into live 120 V ac outlet? still get the same messages?
grabbers? converter.
Yes Yes
Yes No
Is red lead of cable
attached to + terminal Yes
Replace Replace cable of device (black to -)?
modem. or minigrabbers. Yes

No Switch leads at field terminals. Repeat No

Fault Corrected. Step 2. Do you still get the same messages?
Note 1. A battery powered PC may not have enough power to the RS-232 COM port to power the modem.
Check your PC manual for details regarding power saving adjustments.
Note 2. The 200 ohms are built into FBM18, FBM39, FBM43, FBM44, FBM46, FBM243, FBM246, and PC20 optional power supply.
Note 3. Optional Foxboro power supply cannot be used with Coriolis or Magnetic Flow Transmitters.
Also cannot be used with SRD991 Intelligent Valve Positioner when configured for 4 to 20 mA input.
Figure 1. PC20 Fault Analysis - Repeated Communication Failures (FoxCom Protocol)

68
4. Troubleshooting MI 020-495 – November 2002

HART Protocol

This fault analysis Step 1: After launching the program, do you always get a message
No
is for repeated “Could not initialize the IFD Modem” followed by a message after
communication clicking the OK button “Unable to establish connection. Either no
failures only. modem or no device on the modem was found.”?

Yes
Fault Corrected.
No Step 2: Under the File menu, click on Connect to Device.
Do you see the same messages as in Step 1?
No
Increase voltage or reduce loop Yes
load. Repeat Step 2. Do you still No
get the same messages? Is voltage at device Step 3: Under the Options menu, select Settings
field terminals at -IFD Modem Setup and change the COM port.
Yes Yes least 16 V dc? Repeat Step 2. Do you see the same messages as in
Step 1?
Is there at least 250 Ω between the
power supply and where the cable Yes No
attaches to the loop wiring? See Note 2.
Is modem connection to
Yes No the computer tight?
Add at least 250 Ω to the loop wiring at Yes
No
the power supply. Repeat Step 2.
Do you get the same messages? Tighten cable connections. Repeat
Step 2. Same messages?
Yes No
Yes No
Fault
Corrected. See Note 1. If battery powered PC,
turn on the ac power to the computer
Attach HART Model 275 Repeat Step 2. Same messages? No
to the cable connections. Yes Is voltage at device
Can you communicate field terminals at Yes
with the device? least 16 V dc? Fault corrected.
Does other device (mouse,
No etc.) attached to the same
Yes No No
COM port work correctly?
Fix Is there continuity on both Fix computer.
leads of power box and No Yes
Device.
power converter? No
Do you have an optional Foxboro power
No supply attached to the modem? See Note 3.

Repeat Step 3. Replace Yes

Same messages? box and/or Plug converter into 120 V ac
converter. Is power converter plugged No
No Yes into live 120 V ac outlet? outlet. Repeat Step 2. Do you
still get the same messages?
Replace
Yes Yes
modem. Yes
Yes Is red lead of cable
attached to + terminal
of device (black to -)?

Yes
No Switch leads at field terminals. Repeat No
Fault Corrected.
Step 1. Do you still get the same messages?

Note 1. A battery powered PC may not have enough power to the RS-232 COM port to power the modem.
Check your PC manual for details regarding power saving adjustments.
Note 2. The 250 ohms are built into the PC20 optional power supply.
Note 3. Optional Foxboro power supply cannot be used with 120 V ac powered Transmitters.
Also cannot be used with SRD991 Intelligent Valve Positioner with HART protocol.

Figure 2. PC20 Fault Analysis - Repeated Communication Failures (HART Protocol)

69
MI 020-495 – November 2002 4. Troubleshooting

70
Appendix A. 820, 860, and
I/A Series Pressure Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 820, 860, and I/A Series Intelligent
Pressure Transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurator. It contains
information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Device Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.
NOTE
This appendix applies to Foxboro I/A Series Pressure Transmitters with both
FoxCom and HART protocol. The text applies to both devices unless specifically
identified as pertaining to one or the other.

Device Data Screen

Figure A-1. Sample Device Data Screen

71
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Error Messages
Status Error Messages

Table 1. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Error
Error diagnostic error. Messages to determine problem and corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Electronics Internal device tests have Replace electronics.
Error* failed.
Sensor1 Sensor input out of Message disappears when input returns to within
Out of Rng range. acceptable limits.
Temp Sen1 Transmitter Transmitter can be configured to continue operating
Out of Rng temperature out of and use a default temperature for measurement
range. compensation. Message disappears when temperature
returns to within acceptable limits.
Temp Sen2 Transmitter Transmitter can be configured to continue operating
Out of Rng temperature out of and use a default temperature for measurement
range. compensation. Message disappears when temperature
returns to within acceptable limits.
* 820 and 860 Transmitters only.

Diagnostic Error Messages

NOTE
Before following the recommended actions listed below, try to clear the error
message by turning off and reapplying power to the transmitter.

72
 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 2. Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages

Code Error Message Recommended Action

01 CPU Instruct Error Replace amplifier.
02 ROM Checksum Error Replace amplifier.
03 EEPROM Chksum Err Make a change to the transmitter database and download to the
transmitter. If this does not clear the problem, replace amplifier.
04 RAM Error Replace amplifier.
05 Power Supply Fail Replace amplifier.
06 Battery Failure Replace amplifier.
07 Input Range Error See status to indicate which input is out of range and make
necessary correction.
08 Output I/O Error Replace amplifier.
09 Communication Err Replace amplifier.
0A Math Error Check transmitter database and correct any problems. If
problem persists, replace amplifier.
0B RealTime Clock Err Replace amplifier.
0C Input 1 = 0 Sensor input bad; check sensor.
0D Wrong MCU Replace amplifier.
0E Device Failure Replace amplifier.
20 Input 1 > Up Limit Sensor input too high, check sensor.(a)
21(b) Input 2 > Up Limit Transmitter temperature out of range. Transmitter can be
configured to continue operating and use a default temperature
for measurement compensation.(a)
22(c) Input 3 > Up Limit Transmitter temperature out of range. Transmitter can be
configured to continue operating and use a default temperature
for measurement compensation.(a)
25(b) Input 2 < Low Limit Transmitter temperature out of range. Transmitter can be
configured to continue operating and use a default temperature
for measurement compensation.(a)
26(d) Input 3 < Low Limit Transmitter temperature out of range. Transmitter can be
configured to continue operating and use a default temperature
for measurement compensation.(a)
29(b) Input 2 = 0 Transmitter temperature out of range. Transmitter can be
configured to continue operating and use a default temperature
for measurement compensation.(a)
2F Offline Cfg w/Err Replace amplifier.
a. Error message disappears when cause of error returns to within acceptable limits.
b. 860 Transmitter only.
c. 820 Transmitter only.
d. 820 and 860 Transmitters only.

73
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 820, 860, or I/A Series Pressure
Transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurator:
♦ ReZero Transmitter
♦ Point Calibration
♦ ReRange
♦ mA Calibration
♦ Restore Default.
The ReZero and Point Calibration procedures adjust the transmitter output. The ReZero
procedure zeros the transmitter at the Lower Range Value (LRV). The 1-Point Calibration
procedure allows you to establish a calibration point that may or may not be the Lower Range
Value (LRV). The 2-Point Calibration procedure allows you to specify lower and upper
calibration points that may or may not be the Lower Range (LRV) and Upper Range Values
(URV).
Each transmitter is calibrated at the factory to a specified range. If the new range is the same as the
factory range, you should perform only a ReZero or a 1-Point Calibration procedure. If the new
range changes the span by less than a 2-to-1 ratio, you should perform a ReRange. If you make a
large change in range (turndown ratio greater than 2), you may need to perform a 2-Point
Calibration to obtain optimum accuracy.
For all calibration procedures, calibration points are read from the transmitter at the start of the
procedure. Also note that if the transmitter is configured for a square root output, the
IFDC/PC20 places it in linear mode during calibration and resets it to Square Root mode at the
end of the procedure.
NOTE
Transmitters must be calibrated using forward action (increasing input increases
output). If your transmitter has reverse output action (increasing input decreases
output), calibrate it so that calibrated LRV = desired URV and calibrated URV =
desired LRV. Then, after calibration, change the LRV and URV back to the correct
values.
On an 820 Series Transmitter, if LRV pressure is negative or if URV = 0, calibrate
the transmitter so that LRV = 0 and URV = a positive value equal to the span of the
transmitter. After you complete the calibration procedure, reset the LRV and URV
to the desired values.
Example: To calibrate for a range of 100 to 0 inches H2O, first calibrate the LRV to
0 inches H2O and then calibrate the URV to 100 inches H2O. Then rerange the
LRV to 100 inches H2O and rerange the URV to 0 inches H2O.

74
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

ReZero
This function enables you to rezero and rerange your device at the Lower Range Value (LRV).
The procedure follows:
1. Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. If your device is configured for Square Root mode, select Continue to change to
Linear mode for Calibration. The configuration is automatically placed back in
Square Root mode when leaving Calibration. If your device is configured for Linear
mode, ignore this step.
4. If your LRV was not zero, you are prompted to change the value if you wish and then
Continue. If your LRV was zero, ignore this step.
5. When the displayed measurement is stable, select Continue. The average of the last
five readings is shown. Select Continue again to accept this value.
6. Enter the operator’s initials and select Continue. The current calibration date is
automatically displayed. See Figure A-2.
7. Select ReRange to change the current range settings or Continue to complete the
operation.
8. If reranging, enter the new LRV and URV on the ReRange screen and select
Continue. The ReZero screen reappears. Select Continue to complete the operation.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

75
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Figure A-2. Sample ReZero Screen

Point Calibration
This function enables you set the Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value and to calibrate the
device using points that may or may not be these values. The procedure follows:
1. Select Point Calibration from the Calibration menu or the Calibration icon from
the device toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. If your device is configured for Square Root mode, select Continue to change to
Linear mode for Calibration. The configuration is automatically placed back in
Square Root mode when leaving Calibration. If your device is configured for Linear
mode, ignore this step.
4. Select 1-Point or 2-Point Calibration and Continue.

76
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure A-3. Sample Point Calibration Screen

5. Enter your desired Lower Calibration Point, apply the lower calibration point pressure
to the device, and select Continue.
6. When the displayed measurement is stable, select Continue. The average of the last
five readings is shown. Select Continue again to accept this value.
7. If you selected a 2-Point Calibration, enter your desired Upper Calibration Point,
apply the upper calibration point pressure to the device, and select Continue.
8. When the displayed measurement is stable, select Continue. The average of the last
five readings is shown. Select Continue again to accept this value.
9. Enter the calibrator’s initials and select Continue. The current calibration date is
automatically displayed.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

ReRange

FoxCom Device
This function enables you to rerange your device without applying calibration pressure. The
procedure follows:
1. Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

77
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

3. Enter your desired Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) in
either units shown and select Continue.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Figure A-4. Sample ReRange Screen (FoxCom Device)

HART Device
This function enables you to rerange your device without applying calibration pressure. The
procedure follows:
1. Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Enter your desired Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) in
units shown. If a measurement is in Square Root mode, enter the Span for that
measurement. If in Linear mode, enter Span Offset for each measurement. Select
Continue.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

78
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure A-5. Sample ReRange Screen (HART Device)

Restore Default
This function enables you to restore all calibration parameters to their factory default settings.
1. Select Restore Default from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. To reconfirm that you want to restore all calibration parameters to their default
settings, select Continue.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
NOTE
Before performing a mA Calibration, perform the Point Calibration procedure
described on page 76. A mA calibration may no longer be necessary.

79
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Procedure for a FoxCom Device

1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.

Figure A-6. Sample mA Calibration Screen

5. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select
Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output on the meter. The cumulative
change is shown on the screen display.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change and save the
calibration to the transmitter, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

80
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Procedure for a HART Device

1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select the mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.

Figure A-7. Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen (HART Device)

5. Enter the measured value and select Apply. Repeat this step until the output matches
the measured value.
6. Select Continue.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Enter the measured value and select Apply. Repeat this step until the output matches
the measured value.
9. Select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

81
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen
The Identifier screen for a FoxCom device is somewhat different than that for a HART device. A
description of each follows:

FoxCom Device

Figure A-8. Sample Identifier Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters
become the database filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.

82
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Hart Device

Figure A-9. Sample Identifier Tab Screen (HART Device)

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 8 characters. The tag number becomes
the transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 16 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Tag Date Enter a date. It is possible to enter any valid future or past
date. For example, this field may be used for storing the date
of the last calibration or a future planned maintenance date.
Message Enter maximum of 32 characters. This field can be used for
company internal designations, device numbers for material
industry (business), final alignment of device, startup of
device, or other purpose.

83
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen

FoxCom Device

Figure A-10. Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)

Field Entry
Measurement #1
Square Root Mode √ = Square Root; Blank = Linear.
Units Select from menu of pressure units or select Custom to enter
user-configured units.
Lower Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA.
Must be 0 if M1 or M2 is in Square Root mode.
Upper Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA.
Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of transmitter.
Measurement #2 Similar to Measurement #1.
Turn off Enable or Disable Measurement #2.
Sqroot Low Flow Mode Select Active or 10% of Flow.
External Zero Not Applicable.
Output Mode Select Digital or 4-20 mA.
mA Output Fail Safe Select Down Scale or Up Scale.
Output Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds.
Temperature Fail Strategy Select Fail or Continue.

84
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

HART Device

Figure A-11. Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen (HART Device)

Field Entry
Measurement #1
Units Select from menu of pressure units.
Lower Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA.
Must be 0 if M1 or M2 is in Square Root mode.
Upper Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA.
Mode Select Linear, Square Root (Cutoff <1%), or Square Root
(Linear <4%)
Measurement #2
Units Select from menu of pressure units.
Mode Select Linear, Square Root (Cutoff <1%), or Square Root
(Linear <4%)
Digital Offset/Span Enter Span or Offset Span on screen provided.
Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds.
Temperature Fail Strategy Select Fail or Continue.
External Zero Not Applicable.
mA Output Fail Safe Select Down Scale or Up Scale.

85
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

Database Report
Table 3. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 2d Formula Set 1 03 03 13 01 0b 80 03 70 0c 7c 02 02
Tag Number PC10_20_STD2 Formula Set 2 0b 00 03 68 0c 74 02 01 05 39 03 34
Tag Name UNIT 08 #2 Formula Set 3 0c 01 03 30 0c 02 02 03 05 2d 03 28
Device Name DevNam Formula Set 4 0c 01 03 24 0c 01 03 20 03 03 0c 02
Geo Location TEST LAB #2 Formula Set 5 02 03 05 1d 03 18 0c 01 03 14 0c 01
Meas #1 Units inH2O Formula Set 6 03 10 03 03 0c 02 02 03 05 0d 03 08
Meas #1 Units inH2O Formula Set 7 0c 01 03 04 0c 01 03 00 03 03 13 00
#1 Upper Range Value 100 Formula Set 8 02 03 14 01 02 01 04 01 03 01 03 03
#1 Lower Range Value 0 Formula Set 9 00 61 0c 01 02 01 14 01 03 01 02 03
Meas #1 Span 100 Formula Set 10 05 5e 03 58 0c 02 02 02 05 55 03 02
Meas #1 Offset 0 Formula Set 11 03 50 13 01 02 02 03 03 ff
Meas #2 Span 100 Formula Set 12 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Meas #2 Offset 0 Formula Set 13 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Serial Number Neponset# Formula Set 14 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Calib Initials jackie Formula Set 15 02 00 03 01 23 00 43 01 63
Last Calib Date 7/14/98 Formula Set 16 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Sensor Mfg Date 9/30/93 Coef #01 0
Calibration Slope 1 Coef #02 0
Calibration Offset 0 Coef #03 0
Personality Word 0 Coef #04 0
Sensor Id Number 0c 01 Coef #05 0
Sensor MS Code 01 Coef #06 0
Device Type 00 Coef #07 0
Manufacture Date 12/21/93 Coef #08 0
Minor Revision Code 05 Coef #09 0
Major Revision Code 01 Coef #10 0
Max Request Length 6656 Coef #11 0
Max Reply Length 5376 Coef #12 0
Max Param Number 69 Coef #13 0
TON Count (4 mA) 600 Coef #14 0
TON Count (20 mA) 3200 Coef #15 0
Misc. Flags 01 Coef #16 0
Freq Strategy Flg 01 Coef #17 0
Database Chng Cntr cb Coef #18 0
n/a 00 Coef #19 0
Scan Rate (Freq 1) 00 Coef #20 0
Scan Rate (Freq 2) 1f Coef #21 Temp C1 -28.7518
Scan Rate (Freq 3) 00 Coef #22C2 -1.946529
Scan Rate (Freq 4) 00 Coef #23C3 115.1565
Clk Div Factor 1 00 Coef #24 1.507587
Clk Div Factor 2 00 Damping 1
Clk Div Factor 3 00 Sqroot Turndown 1
Clk Div Factor 4 00 Coef #27 -F1LRV 3.155942

86
Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 3. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Freq 1 Upper Rnge 32 Coef #28 0
Freq 2 Upper Rnge 241 Coef #29 -F3LRV -0.6692498
Freq 3 Upper Rnge 22 Coef #30 1/F1Span 0.1595369
Freq 4 Upper Rnge 0 Coef #31 0
Freq 1 Lower Rnge -8 Coef #03 8.620579
Freq 2 Lower Rnge 96 n/a 00
Freq 3 Lower Rnge -8 Comm Turnaround 01
Freq 4 Lower Rnge 0 Diag Error Code 00 00
Test S/R Address ff ff Clock Cor. IT1 0
Default Freq 2 134 Clock Cor. IT2 0
Default Freq 3 1 Reserved 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Default Freq 4 1 EEPROM Checksum 0

87
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix A. 820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters

88
Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature
Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the RTT10 Temperature Transmitters in
regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Device Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure B-1. Sample RTT10 Device Data Screen

89
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters

Error Messages
Table 4. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to
Error diagnostic error. determine problem and corrective action
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter sent Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Sent a bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received a bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Sensor #1 Sensor #1 malfunction. Check and/or replace Sensor #1 and associated sensor
Failed wiring.
Sensor #2 Sensor #2 malfunction. Check and/or replace Sensor #2 and associated sensor
Failed wiring.
Electronics Internal RTT10 tests Replace electronics.
Failed have failed.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an RTT10 transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ ReZero Transmitter
♦ N-Point Calibration
♦ Custom Input Curve
♦ ReRange
♦ mA Calibration
♦ Restore Factory Calibration
♦ Restore Factory mA
♦ Enable Custom Curve.

90
Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

RTT10 calibration allows you to correct the transmitter output for differences between the input
sensor and the standard curve for sensors of that type. The ReZero and N-Point Calibrations
automatically calculate the temperature points and offset values. The custom curve function
allows you to enter up to ten sets of points, but you must determine the offset values.

ReZero
This function enables you to set your transmitter input to zero. The procedure to do this is as
follows:
1. Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. At the prompt, select Continue again.
4. Select Continue when ready to set input to 0.00 equivalent.
5. When the displayed measurement is stable, select Continue.
6. The final ReZero value is shown. Select Continue again to accept this value and save
the calibration to the transmitter.
7. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

N-Point Calibration
This function enables you to perform a 1- or 2-Point Calibration.
For a 1-Point Calibration, a constant offset is computed and utilized over the entire sensor curve
and for a 2-Point Calibration, the resulting offsets are straightline calculated to the LRV and URV.
The procedure to do an N-Point Calibration is as follows:
1. Select N-Point Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select 1- or 2-Point calibration. Enter the Lower and Upper Range Values and the
desired reading you want to see reported for each calibration point. Select Continue.

91
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters

Figure B-2. Sample RTT10 N-Point Calibration Screen

4. Select Continue again when you are ready to set the input for Calibration Point 1.
5. When the displayed measurement is stable for Calibration Point 1, select Continue.
6. At the prompt, select Continue again to accept this value and save it to the
transmitter.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for Calibration Point 2.
8. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

ReRange
This function enables you to rerange your device without applying inputs representing
temperatures. The procedure to do this is as follows:
1. Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Enter your desired Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) and
select Continue.

92
Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure B-3. Sample RTT10 ReRange Screen

4. At the prompt, select Continue to save the new range to the transmitter.
5. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

Custom Input Curve

This function permits you to correct for inaccuracies in the input sensor by entering measurement
and offset values for 12 points on the curve. The system then calculates a smooth input curve that
follows these 12 data points.
NOTE
After performing the Custom Input Curve procedure, the custom curve must be
enabled before it takes effect. See “Enable Custom Curve” on page 94.

The procedure to input a custom curve follows:

1. Select Custom Input Curve from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select the number of points you want in your custom curve (1-12). The remaining
points are set to an overrange value (for example, 10000).

93
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters

Figure B-4. Sample RTT10 Custom Input Curve Screen

4. In the Measured column, enter the values the RTT10 now displays; in the Offset
column, enter the offset you want. For example, if a Measured value was 100.00 but
you wanted 100.25, enter 100.00 as the Measured number and 0.25 as the Offset
number. Select Continue.
5. At the prompt, select Continue to save the custom curve to the transmitter.
6. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

Enable Custom Curve

This function enables a custom input curve that you previously entered. The procedure follows:
1. Select Enable Custom from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. To reconfirm that you want to enable the Custom Curve, select Continue. The
Custom Curve is enabled.

94
Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure B-5. RTT10 Enable Custom Curve Screen

4. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

Restore Factory Calibration

This function overwrites any existing 1-Point, 2-Point, or Custom Curve calibration and restores
the Factory Calibration curve to the transmitter. The procedure follows:
1. Select Restore Factory Cal from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. To reconfirm that you want to overwrite your present N-Point or Custom Calibration
and restore the Factory Calibration, select Continue.
4. The factory calibration is restored.
5. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

Restore Factory mA
This function restores the mA calibration factory settings. The procedure to do this is as follows:
1. Select Restore Factory mA from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. To reconfirm that you want to restore the mA calibration factory settings, select
Continue. The factory calibration is restored and calibration date automatically
changes.
4. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

95
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
NOTE
Before performing a mA Calibration, perform the N-Point Calibration procedure
described on page 91. A mA calibration may no longer be necessary.

The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is:

1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.

Figure B-6. Sample RTT10 mA Calibration Screen

5. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select
Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
in the screen.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

96
Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure B-7. Sample RTT10 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

97
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters

Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen

Figure B-8. Sample RTT10 Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen

Field Entry
Measurement Units Select from menu of units.
Lower Range Limit Shows value of the Lower Range Limit of transmitter.
Upper Range Limit Shows value of the Upper Range Limit of transmitter.
Lower Range Value Enter the value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA.
Upper Range Value Enter the value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA.
Input Type Select RTD Sensor, ThermoCouple, mV Input, or Special Input.
Input Mode Select from menu of inputs.
Wire Type For RTD, select 2-Wire, Single/3-Wire, Dual/3-Wire, or 4-Wire.
Measurement Type Shows Dual for Dual/3Wire; Single Input for all other wire types.
3-Wire Dual For Dual/3-Wire RTD, select Average, Redundant, or Difference.
Output Mode Select Digital or 4-20 mA.
mA Output Failsafe Select Upscale or Downscale. Configures output to go upscale or
downscale if a transmitter failure occurs.
Noise Rejection Enter filter value in seconds during which noise in the transmitter output
signal is rejected. A low value decreases filtering action; a high value
increases it.
Damping Select one of nine choices from No Damping to 32 seconds.

98
Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Database Report
NOTE
If a parameter in the report is “UNUSED,” the corresponding value shown has no
meaning for that device.

Table 5. Sample Database Report

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 31 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Tag Number PC10_20_STD2 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Tag Name TEST STD #2 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Device Name DevNam UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Geo Location TEST LAB #2 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Meas #1 Units C UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Meas #2 Units mV UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Upper Range Value 850 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Lower Range Value -200 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Upper Range Limit 850 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Lower Range Limit -200 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Noise Rejection 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED 6.894108e-041 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Last Calib Date 7/16/98 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Sensor Mfg Date 1/15/90 Cal Point 1 0
UNUSED 0 Cal Offset 1 0.25
UNUSED 1.101654e-033 Cal Point 2 10000
UNUSED 0 Cal Offset 2 0
Sensor Id Number 05 00 Cal Point 3 10000
Input Type 21 Cal Offset 3 0
Device Type 00 Cal Point 4 10000
Manufacture Date 12/30/35 Cal Offset 4 0
Minor Revision Code 00 Cal Point 5 10000
Major Revision Code 01 Cal Offset 5 0
Max Request Length 18 Cal Point 6 10000
Max Reply Length 18 Cal Offset 6 0
Max Param Number 00 Cal Point 7 10000
4 mA Cal Offset 3000 Cal Offset 7 0
20 mA Cal Offset 3000 Cal Point 8 10000
Misc. Flags 81 Cal Offset 8 0
Freq Strategy Flg 00 Cal Point 9 10000
Database Chng Cntr cd Cal Offset 9 0
UNUSED 61 Cal Point 10 10000
UNUSED b3 Cal Offset 10 0
UNUSED 00 Cal Point 11 10000
UNUSED 01 Cal Offset 11 0

99
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix B. RTT10 Temperature Transmitters

Table 5. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
UNUSED b8 Cal Point 12 10000
UNUSED 0b Cal Offset 12 0
UNUSED b8 Damping 0
UNUSED 0b 4 mA TON Count 403.378
UNUSED c1 20 mA TON Count 8017.203
UNUSED 5.238894e-041 UNUSED 5.918636e-039
UNUSED 0 UNUSED -1.654361e-023
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 1.762151e-038
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 5.920878e-039
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00
UNUSED 0 Comm Turnaround 00
UNUSED 0 Diag Error Code 00 00
UNUSED 00 00 UNUSED 5.852216e-039
UNUSED 0 UNUSED -6.462349e-027
UNUSED 0 N_A 84 2e 41 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED 0 EEPROM Checksum 0

100
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20
Temperature Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the RTT20 and TI20 Temperature
transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Status Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.
NOTE
1. This appendix applies to RTT20 transmitters with both FoxCom and HART
protocols. The text applies to both devices unless specifically identified as pertaining
to one or the other.
2. The RTT20 and the TI20 transmitters are identical with respect to the FoxCom
protocol. All other references to RTT20 also apply to the TI20 transmitter.

Device Data Screen

Figure C-1. Sample RTT20 Device Data Screen

101
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

NOTE
The Device Data screen for the HART transmitter does not have the Device Name
and Location parameters.

Error Messages
Table 6. Transmitter Status Error Messages for a FoxCom Transmitter

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Error Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to
diagnostic error. determine problem and corrective action
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter sent Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Sent a bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Sensor #1 Sensor #1 malfunction. Check and/or replace Sensor #1 and associated sensor
Failed wiring.
Sensor #2 Sensor #2 malfunction. Check and/or replace Sensor #2 and associated sensor
Failed wiring.
Electronics Fail Internal RTT20 tests Replace electronics.
have failed.

Table 7. Transmitter Status Error Messages for a HART Transmitter

Message Explanation Recommended Action

HART Status
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. Try the command again later.
Device Malfunction Severe problem. Check the other status bits.
Configuration Changed The configuration of the This flag can be reset with the menu
transmitter has been changed. item Reset Changed Flag.
Cold Start Device rebooted. Check power supply.

102
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 7. Transmitter Status Error Messages for a HART Transmitter (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Output Current Fixed The output current is fixed. The The Device Specific Transmitter
reason might be that it is in the Status may show the reason for the
fail-safe state. fail-safe state.
Analog Output Analog Output out of 4 to 20 mA PV exceeds the configured range.
Saturated range. Check range limits.
Variable (not Primary) Electronic or sensor temperature Check Device Specific Transmitter
out of Limits out of limits. Status for more information.
Primary Variable Sensor signal out of limits. Check Device Specific Transmitter
out of Limits Status and applied process value.
Device Specific Transmitter Status
Configured Measuring The measuring range exceeds the Check range.
Range Invalid upper and/or lower range limits.
Device Temperature The device temperature was Check device or the temperature of
outside -40/85 C outside the range of -40°C and the environment.
+85°C.
Sensor Open or Short The resistance of the sensor is Check sensor. Refer to the Func-
greater (or less) than the expected tional Test in MI EMT 0111 A.
resistance.
PV out of Sensor Limit PV was not between +/-110% of Check measurement input.
or Bad nominal range.
PROM Checksum Error The PROM may be damaged. Replace transmitter.
EPROM Failed The EEPROM may be damaged. Replace transmitter.
Redundant Sensor Sensor 1 failed. Check sensor.
Failed
Transmitter Failed Electronics may be damaged. Replace the basic transmitter.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an RTT20 transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ N-Point Calibration
♦ Custom Input Curve
♦ ReRange
♦ mA Calibration
♦ Restore Factory mA
♦ ReZero Transmitter (for HART device with RTD sensor only).

103
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

N-Point Calibration
This function enables you to perform a 1-, 2-, 3-, or 5-Point Calibration. The differences are
explained below.

1-Point Calibration
The RTT20 permits you to select any temperature within the configured range that is of
particular interest to you. You are not required to use the LRV as the calibration point. The net
effect is that a constant offset is utilized over the entire sensor curve. To view or change the value
entered, see the note in “Custom Input Curve” on page 105.

2-Point Calibration
The RTT20 permits you to select any two temperatures in the region of interest within the
configured range of the transmitter. You are not required to use the LRV and URV as the
calibration points. The temperatures must be increasing in value. The resulting offsets are then
straightline calculated to the LRV and URV. Picture an offset line defining the correction to the
standard, starting from the LRV, passing through the two calibration points, and continuing to
the URV. To view or change any value entered, see the note in Custom Input Curve section on
page 105.

3- and 5- Point Calibration

The RTT20 permits you to select any three (or five) temperatures in the region of interest within
the configured range of the transmitter. The temperature must be increasing in value. The
resulting offsets are then straightline calculated to the LRV and URV. Picture an offset line
defining the correction to the standard, starting from the LRV, passing through the three (or five)
calibration points, and continuing to the URV. To view or change any values entered, see note in
“Custom Input Curve” on page 105.

N-Point Calibration Procedure

1. Select N-Point Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select 1-, 2-, 3-, or 5-Point Calibration. Enter the desired reading you want to see
reported for each calibration point, enter the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
NOTE
On 3-point and 5-point calibrations, the end points are fixed. Therefore, you only
need to enter the mid point values.

104
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure C-2. Sample RTT20 N-Point Calibration Screen

4. Select Continue when you are ready to set input for Calibration Point 1.
5. Select Continue again when ready to set input to desired reading.
6. When the displayed measurement is stable for Calibration Point 1, select Continue
again.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for each point.
8. Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter. The current calibration
date is automatically displayed.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Custom Input Curve

The Custom Input Curve screen functions a little differently. If the Points field is 0, then the
transmitter is using the factory installed calibration. If the number of points is 2 to 22, the
transmitter uses the calibration data entered into the custom curve table.
NOTE
Since it is not possible to leave the input calibration values in memory when
performing a Custom Input Curve calibration, it is strongly recommended that the
transmitter database be stored to a file prior to making drastic changes in the
calibration data.

105
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

The procedure to input a custom curve is as follows:

1. Select Custom Input Curve from Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select the number of points you want in your custom curve (2 - 22).

Figure C-3. Sample RTT20 Custom Input Curve Screen

! CAUTION
If all the Measured/Desired fields are “0”, then the number of points must be “0”
prior to exiting the Custom Input Curve screen. If the number of points is not zero
(2-22) and no measured/desired data is entered into the fields on the Custom Input
Curve screen, the transmitter drives its output to whatever “0” means for that sensor.
The transmitter does not respond to any change in input in this condition.

NOTE
The calibration data from any of the above calibration options is stored in the
custom curve memory locations. Therefore, if you wish to view or change a specific
data point, you can enter the custom curve selection and view, edit, or clear all
values.

106
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

4. In the Measured column, enter the values the RTT20 displays now; in the Desired
column, enter the values you want displayed. For example, if a Measured value was
100.00 but you wanted 100.25, enter 100.00 as the Measured number and 100.25
as the Desired number.
5. Enter the calibrator’s initials and select Continue. The current calibration date is
automatically displayed.
6. Select Continue to save the custom curve to the RTT20 transmitter.
7. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Press Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

ReRange
This function enables you to rerange your device without applying inputs representing
temperatures. The procedure to do this is as follows:
1. Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Enter your desired Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) and
select Continue.

Figure C-4. Sample RTT20 ReRange Screen

4. Select Continue to save the new custom curve to the RTT20 transmitter.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

107
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

Restore Factory mA
This function restores the mA calibration factory settings. The procedure to do this is as follows:
1. Select Restore Factory mA from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. To reconfirm that you want to restore the mA calibration factory settings, select
Continue. The Factory Calibration is restored and the calibration date automatically
changes.

Figure C-5. Sample RTT20 Restore Factory Calibration Screen

4. Enter the calibrator’s initials and select Continue.

5. Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
NOTE
Before performing a mA Calibration, perform the N-Point Calibration procedure
described on page 104. A mA calibration may no longer be necessary.

Procedure for a FoxCom Device

1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.

108
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure C-6. Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen (FoxCom Device)

5. Set Step Size from menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Procedure for a HART Device

1. Select the mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select 4 mA Output.

109
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

Figure C-7. Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen (HART Device)

4. Enter the measured value and select Apply. Repeat this step until the output matches
the measured value.
5. Select Continue.
6. Select 20 mA Output.
7. Enter the measured value and select Apply. Repeat this step until the output matches
the measured value.
8. Select Continue.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

110
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen
The Identifier screen for a FoxCom device is somewhat different than that for a HART device. A
description of each follows.

FoxCom Device

Figure C-8. Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters
become the default transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.

111
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

HART Device

Figure C-9. Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen (HART Device)

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 8 characters. The tag number becomes
the transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 16 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Tag Date Enter a date. It is possible to enter any valid future or past
date. For example, this field may be used for storing the date
of the last calibration or a future planned maintenance date.
Message Enter maximum of 32 characters. This field can be used for
company internal designations, device numbers for material
industry (business), final alignment of device, startup of
device, or other purpose.

112
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Input Tab Screen

Figure C-10. Sample RTT20 Input Tab Screen

Field Entry
Sensor Type Select RTD Sensor, ThermoCouple, or Special Input.
Input Config. Select from menu of input types.
Wire Type For RTDs, select from menu of wire types.
Linearization Select Normal or Dewpoint.
2-Wire Dual Calculation For 2-Wire Dual RTD, select Redundant, Average, or
Difference.
Lower Range Limit Shows value of Lower Range Limit of transmitter.
Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of transmitter.
Lower Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA.
Upper Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA.
Measurement Units Select from menu of units.
Secondary Measurement Select from menu of units.
Units
Cold Junction For thermocouples, select Internal Sensor, External Sensor,
Configuration Fixed Value, or Disabled.
Cold Junction Fixed Value If fixed value, enter value.

113
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

Options Tab Screen

FoxCom Device

Figure C-11. Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)

Field Entry
Output Mode Select Analog (4 - 20 mA) or Digital.
Fault Detection On √ = On; Blank = Off.
Analog Output Failsafe
Failsafe On √ = Failsafe On; Blank = Failsafe Off.
Range If Failsafe is On, select 3.6-3.8 (Downscale) or 20.75-23.0 (Upscale).
Value Enter value within range selected.
Damping Select one of nine choices from No Damping to 32 seconds.
Sensor Validation Enter value between 0.25 and 10 seconds.
Intelligent Smoothing Enter value between 0 and 30 seconds.
Power Supply Frequency Select 50 or 60 Hz.
Power Supply Filter Select Standard or High Speed.

114
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

HART Device

Figure C-12. Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen (HART Device)

Most of the fields for a HART device are the same as for an RTT20 FoxCom device. The HART
device has the following additional fields.

Field Entry
Output Mode Select Analog or Multidrop.
Poll Address If Multidrop, select address between 1 and 15.
Analog Output Failsafe
Store Last Value or Select Store Last Value for last valid value or
Substitute Value Substitute Value for value specified.
Failsafe Reset Select Auto or Manual.
Write Protect (Read only) √ = Write protection; Blank = No write protection.

115
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

Display Tab Screen

Figure C-13. Sample RTT20 Display Tab Screen

Field Entry
Type of Display Installed Shows None, One Line or Three Line indicator installed.
Pushbutton Enable √ = Enabled; Blank = Disabled.
Language Select English, French, German, or Spanish.
Top Line Display Select from menu (EGU, Percent of Range, mA ,
EGU and Percent, or EGU and mA).
Bottom Line Label If three-line display, enter maximum of seven characters.

116
Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Database Report
Table 8. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 32 Cal Point X3 30
Tag Number STD2 Cal Point Y3 50
Tag Name Tag Name Cal Point X4 0
Device Name DevNam Cal Point Y4 0
Geo Location Location Cal Point X5 0
Sensor Number 03 Cal Point Y5 0
Upper Range Limit 850 Cal Point X6 0
Lower Range Limit -200 Cal Point Y6 0
Sensor Validation 0.5 Cal Point X7 0
Failsafe 01 Cal Point Y7 0
Failsafe Value 21 Cal Point X8 0
Local Indic Type 02 Cal Point Y8 0
Local Indic Keys 00 Cal Point X9 0
Local Indic Lang 00 Cal Point Y9 0
Local Indic Disp 02 Cal Point X10 0
Output Mode 01 Cal Point Y10 0
Measurement Units 20 Cal Point X11 0
Intel Smoothing 10 Cal Point Y11 0
Sensor Type 01 Cal Point X12 0
Damping 0 Cal Point Y12 0
URV 850 Cal Point X13 0
LRV -200 Cal Point Y13 0
Factory Info FACTORY INFO Cal Point X14 0
Line Freq Filter 02 Cal Point Y14 0
Sens Fault Detect 00 Cal Point X15 0
Display Label FOXBORO Cal Point Y15 0
Serial Number 9472 Cal Point X16 0
Linearization Mode 00 Cal Point Y16 0
Manufacturing Date 5/21/96 Cal Point X17 0
Cal Date 7/14/98 Cal Point Y17 0
Characterization 00 Cal Point X18 0
Calib Initials STD Cal Point Y18 0
Device Type 00 Cal Point X19 0
Unused Parameter 11/8/95 Cal Point Y19 0
Unused Parameter 00 Cal Point X20 0
Major Revision Code 01 Cal Point Y20 0
Unused Parameter 18 Cal Point X21 0
Unused Parameter 18 Cal Point Y21 0
Unused Parameter 00 Cal Point X22 0
Primary and Sec EGU C Cal Point Y22 0
Secondary Meas Units 20 Cal Offset 4 ma 3133
Number Cal Points 03 Cal Offset 20 ma 3133
Cal Point X1 0 TON Count 4 ma 284.9344

117
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix C. RTT20/TI20 Temperature Transmitters

Table 8. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Cal Point Y1 10 TON Count 20 ma 4525.617
Cal Point X2 15 Diag Error Code 00 00
Cal Point Y2 25 Cold Junction Config 00
Cold Junction Fixed 0
Database Change Coun 5e
FoxCom Turn-around 00

118
Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20
Magnetic Flow Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the IMT10/20 Magnetic Flow
transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurator. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Device Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Sample Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure D-1. Sample IMT20 Device Data Screen

119
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Error Messages
Status Error Messages

Table 9. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Initializing Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Error
Error diagnostic error. Messages to determine problem and corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Signal Lock Set External contact is set. Set by user; no action required.
Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received bad message. problem, contact the CSC.

Diagnostic Error Messages

For additional information, see IMT20 with 8000A, 8300, 2800, and 9300 Transmitters
Maintenance (MI 021-384).
Table 10. Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages

Code Error Message Recommended Action

02 ROM Checksum Error Contact the CSC.
0C Hardware Failure Check line frequency reference voltage per the power
supply tests procedure in MI 021-384. If voltage is
incorrect, install a new power supply assembly. If voltage is
correct, the electronics module may be defective.
0D ShortWire/BadSwitch Install new electronics module.
10 Amplifier Bad Install new electronics module.
11 Amplifier Bad Install new electronics module.
12 Coil/Amp/Electrodes Check if the correct flowtube size is being used for the
process flow range. If correct, rerange the transmitter for
greater flow rate.
Check for a buildup of material in the flowtube. If present,
clean inside of the flowtube.

120
Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 10. Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages (Continued)

Code Error Message Recommended Action

13 Electrodes/Wiring See if a buildup of material on the electrodes has occurred.
If so, clean the inside of the flowtube. If not, check the
electrodes and replace if defective.
14 OpenWire/Coil/LoDrve Check the coil wire connections.
If the connections are OK, disconnect the coil drive wires
from the transmitter and measure the resistance between
the wires. It should be between 1 and 100 Ω. Also measure
the resistance between each wire and ground. It should be
infinite. If the resistance values are correct, the transmitter
power supply or electronics module may be defective.
If the fault cannot be determined and the transmitter is
integrally mounted to the flowtube, the flowtube coils are
probably defective. If the transmitter is remotely mounted
from the flowtube, verify that the coil drive wires are
securely connected.
If the fault cannot be determined, disconnect the coil wires
from the terminals and measure the resistance between the
terminals. It should be between 1 and 100 Ω. Then verify
that the resistance between each terminal and ground is
infinite. If any resistance is incorrect, the flowtube coil is
probably defective. If the resistances are correct, install new
coil drive wires between the flowtube and transmitter. For
installation details, refer to IMT20 with 8000A and 8300
Transmitters Installation (MI 021-382).
1B External RAM Bad Install a new electronics module.
20 Under Range Fill the flowtube with process liquid. Verify that the
conductivity is ≥ 5 µS/cm.
21 Over Range Verify that the correct flowtube is being used for the process
flow range. If correct, rerange the transmitter for greater
flow rate.
22 Over Range Verify that the correct flowtube is being used for the process
flow range. If correct, rerange the transmitter for greater
flow rate.
30 Factory Data Lost Install a new electronics module.
31 Invalid P1-P5 Data Check configuration. Reconfigure if necessary.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT10/IMT20 transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurator:
♦ ReRange
♦ mA Calibration.

121
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

ReRange
This function permits you to change the Flow Upper Range Value (URV) and the Display Upper
Range Value without applying flow to the transmitter.
1. Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure D-2. Sample IMT20 ReRange Screen

3. Enter the new Upper Range Value. Note that the new value cannot exceed the value
shown in the bottom left corner of the window nor can it be a value that would yield
a span less than the minimum span shown in the bottom right corner of the window.
Select Continue.
4. Select Continue again to save the new range to the device.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

122
Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

4. Select 4 mA Output.

Figure D-3. Sample IMT20 mA Calibration Screen

5. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select
Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen display.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

123
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure D-4. Sample IMT20 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I/A Series
Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

124
Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen

Figure D-5. Sample IMT20 Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen

Field Entry
Line Size Select nominal diameter of flowtube from menu of choices.
Flow Rate Units Select from menu of units or Custom. If Custom, enter the
conversion factor from USGPM to the Custom unit.
Lining Material Select Ceramic or ptfe (Teflon).
Meter Factor Enter “Cal Factor” from flowtube data plate.
Display Meas/Config Select from menu of choices.
Display Upper Range Enter Upper Range Value of display.
Flow Upper Range Enter Upper Range Value in units shown.
Upper Range Limit Shows Upper Range Limit of device.
Damping Select Auto or any one of eight specific values from 0.20 to
32 seconds.
Damping on Power Up √ = Enabled; Blank = Disabled.
Comm Baud Rate Select from menu of choices.
Signal Lock Alarm Shows Enabled or Disabled.
Pulse Output Select High-2000 Hz or Low Variable.

125
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field Entry
Pulse Scale Enter value between 0.1 and 9.999 Hz if Pulse Output is
Low-Variable. This is the output in pps when the flow rate
through the tube is equal to the Flow Upper Range value.

Database Report
NOTE
If a parameter in the report is “UNUSED,” the corresponding value shown has no
meaning for that device.

Table 11. Sample Database Report

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 2a UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Tag Number FT102A UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Tag Name Boiler Flow UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Device Name DevNam UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Geo Location Plant 3A West UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Meas #1 Units Usgpm UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Meas #2 Units UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Flow Upper Range 155.914 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Flow Lower Range 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Upper Range Limit 170 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Lower Range Limit 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Last Calib Date 1/25/94 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Sensor Mfg Date 5/4/93 0
Scale Factor (P1/P2) UNUSED UNUSED 0
29000
Display Upper Range 99 UNUSED 0
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0
Sensor Id Number 01 00 UNUSED 0
Sensor MS Code 2b UNUSED 0
Device Type 2a UNUSED 0
Manufacture Date 5/4/93 0
Minor Revision Code 2b 0
Major Revision Code 05 UNUSED 0
Max Request Length 8192 UNUSED 0
Max Reply Length 8192 0
Max Param Number 5b UNUSED 0
TON Count (4 mA) 3640 UNUSED 0
TON Count (20 mA) 16355 UNUSED 0

126
Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 11. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Misc. Flags 70 Line Size 1.5
UNUSED 00 UNUSED 0
Database Chng Cntr 31 Meter Factor 18.6
UNUSED 2f Pulse Scale 0
UNUSED 07 UNUSED 0
UNUSED 00 UNUSED 0
UNUSED 01 UNUSED 0
UNUSED c4 mA Percent 0.1495387
UNUSED 09 mA LRV 5.447178
UNUSED cc Damping (x10) 5
UNUSED 39 Width 89
UNUSED 60 P1 2900
UNUSED 1.542549e-041 P2 1
UNUSED 0 Gamma 20615
UNUSED 0 Offset 0
UNUSED 0 Alpha 20538
UNUSED 0 Filter 4155
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00
UNUSED 0 Comm Turnaround 01
UNUSED 0 Diag Error Code 00 00
UNUSED 00 00 UNUSED 0
UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0
UNUSED 0 N_A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
UNUSED 0 EEPROM Checksum 0

127
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix D. IMT10/IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

128
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow
Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the IMT25 and IMT25L Magnetic Flow
transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Device Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Pulse Preset
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.
NOTE
Version 2.0 of the IFDC/PC20 software incorporates full configuration capability
for the HART IMT25 transmitters. Any HART IMT25 database saved to your
computer hard disk for Version 1.0 is not usable for Version 2.0. Therefore, delete
Version 1.0 files and save new files from your transmitter using Version 2.0
software.

Device Data Screen

Figure E-1. Sample IMT25 Device Data Screen

129
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Error Messages
FoxCom Device

Table 12. Transmitter Status Error Messages (FoxCom Devices)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Initializing is required. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to
Error diagnostic error. determine problem and corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Signal Lock External contact is off. Set by user; no action required.
Off
Error in Transmitter cannot exit Correct Diagnostic Error or Secondary Status Error also
Startup its boot code. displayed.
Empty Tube Pipe is empty. See “Empty Pipe Detection” in IMT25 I/A Series
Error Magflow Transmitters (MI 021-390).
Electrode Error Unreliable measure- See Extended Status - Hardware below.
ment of electrode
voltage.
Coil Error Unreliable measure- See Extended Status - Hardware below.
ment of coil current.
Extended Status - Hardware
Coils
Coil Low Transmitter unable to Check coil wiring at flowtube and transmitter.
Coil High generate a reliable Service is required.
measurement of coil
Coil Unstable Cycle power. If the problem persists, service is required.
current.
Positive Coil Check wiring and flowtube coil.
Needed
Negative Coil
Needed
Empty Pipe
Unable to Unable to calibrate. Verify that piping is empty. Check flowtube and
Calibrate transmitter wiring.
EPD Calibration Error during calibration. Verify that EPD parameter is turned on.
Failed

130
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 12. Transmitter Status Error Messages (FoxCom Devices) (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Electrodes
Electrode Low Transmitter unable to Check signal wiring between flowtube and transmitter.
Electrode High generate a reliable Also see Magnetic Flow Transmitters Models IMT25-D
measurement of and IMT25-T with FoxCom (-D) or HART (-T) C...
Electrode
electrode voltage. (MI 021-391).
Unstable
Positive Electrode
Needed
Negative
Electrode Needed
Setup
MultiRange Setup Setup needed. Check that Configuration and Contact Inputs 1 and 2
are set up properly.
Extended Status - Process
Process Problems
Signal Lock Signal lock is on. Check that Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are activated by an
external set of contacts or switch.
Pulses Lag Total Totalizer putting out Reconfigure totalizer display so that each pulse
pulses at the maximum represents a larger volume.
rate but falling behind
the actual total.
Total Rollover Total exceeds limit of Reconfigure total format if necessary and reset totals.
configured format.
A to D Electronics problem. Service is required.
Calibration Failed
Alarms
High Flow Flow above configured Make process change or reconfigure alarm setpoint.
high flow rate.
Low Flow Flow below configured
low flow rate.
High Forward Total above configured Make process change or reconfigure Tot Alm Setpt and
Total 1 High Fwd Tot 1. reset totals.
High Forward Total above configured
Total 2 High Fwd Tot 2.
Empty Pipe Transmitter thinks Make process change or, if not empty, check wiring and
pipe is insufficiently recalibrate.
full to make
measurements.

131
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

HART Device

Table 13. Transmitter Status Error Messages (HART Devices)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

HART Status
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line.
If this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Device Severe problem. Check the other status bits.
Malfunction
Configuration The configuration of the This flag can be reset with the menu item
Changed transmitter has been changed. Reset Changed Flag.
Cold Start Device rebooted. Check power supply.
Output The output current is fixed. The Device Specific Status may show the reason
Current Fixed The reason might be that it for the fail-safe state.
is in the fail-safe state. This
flag is also set when the
HART device is in multidrop
mode.
Analog Output Analog Output out of 4 to The Primary Value (PV) exceeds the configured
Saturated 20 mA range. range. Check range limits.
Nonprimary Not applicable to the IMT25
Variable Out transmitter.
of Limits
Primary Sensor signal out of limits. Check device specific status and applied process
Variable value.
Out of Limits
Device Specific Status
Active Tells whether an active Check Additional Status 1 and 2.
Diagnostic diagnostic condition exists or not.
Prior Tells whether a prior Using the transmitter key pad to obtain
Diagnostic diagnostic condition existed. additional information about the diagnostic.
Use the Test menu to clear.
Alarm Hi Flow Flow above configured high Make process change or reconfigure alarm
Flag flow rate. setpoint.
Alarm Lo Flow Flow below configured low
Flag flow rate.
Alarm EP Flag Fluid level in the pipe is If pipe is full, check electrode wiring and repeat
below the flowtube electrodes. AZL calibration.
Alarm Total 1 Total above configured High Make process change or reconfigure Tot Alm
Flag Fwd Tot 1. Setpt and reset totals.
Alarm Total 2 Total above configured High
Flag Fwd Tot 2.

132
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 13. Transmitter Status Error Messages (HART Devices) (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

AZL Detector Reports AZL Status: Off
(not in use), Empty Pipe,
Not Empty (normal condition).
Auto Zero Lock Reports AZL effect on
outputs: Locked (output
locked), Not Locked
(normal condition),
Disabled (not configured).
Signal Lock Ext. contact signal lock
status: Locked (output
locked), Not Locked
(normal condition),
Disabled (not configured).
Digital Owner Reports what function has
m/A Owner control of the output.
Pulse Owner
Additional Status 1
Measurement
invalid
Input out of Flow Rate above or below Review configuration of URV and Direction.
range URV.
Transmitter Transmitter is in off-line Transmitter may have been put in off-line
mode invalid condition. condition via the keypad or HART
communicator. If not, cycle power.
Inconsistent Configuration error exists. Review configuration for error messages and
configuration make required changes.
Coil problem Transmitter unable to Check coil wiring at flowtube and transmitter.
generate a reliable Cycle power.
measurement of coil current. If the problem persists, service is required.
Loop problem
Transmitter Transmitter error. Cycle power. If problem still exists, service is
failed required.
Novram error Novram error. Cycle power. If problem still exists, service is
required.
Additional Status 2
Alarms exist An alarm exists. See Device Specific Status.
Signal Locked Signal lock is on. Check that Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are activated
by an external set of contacts or switch.
AZL Active

133
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Table 13. Transmitter Status Error Messages (HART Devices) (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Total Rollover Total exceeds limit of Reconfigure total format if necessary and reset
configured format. totals.
Pulses Lag Totalizer putting out pulses Reconfigure totalizer display so that each pulse
Total at the maximum rate but represents a larger volume.
falling behind the actual total.
Electrode Error Unreliable measurement of Check signal wiring between flowtube and
electrode voltage. transmitter. Also see MI 020-391.
Analog Output Fixed
Analog Output
Fixed

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT25 transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurator:
♦ mA Output
♦ Reset Totals
♦ Empty Pipe.

Empty Pipe
The empty pipe detector can be used to force the transmitter outputs to stay at zero when the
flowtube is empty. The empty pipe circuit must be calibrated to the fluid in the flowtube. The
flowtube must be full of process fluid (flowing or still) to use this calibration procedure. The
calibration procedure leaves the empty pipe detector in the ON condition. The detector can be
turned off in the Configuration menu.
1. Select Empty Pipe from the Calibration menu or the Empty Pipe icon from the
device toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Fill the flowtube and then select Continue to start the Empty Pipe Calibration
process.
4. Wait while the device is calibrating.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

mA Output
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required.
However, the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the
output to the output of a specific receiving device.

134
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

FoxCom Device
The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration on a FoxCom device is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Output from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.
5. Set the Step Size (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen display.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurement.

Figure E-2. Sample IMT25 mA Calibration Screen (FoxCom Device)

HART Device
The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration on a HART device is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.

135
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

5. Enter the value from the mA meter in the Measured Value field on your screen and
select Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until the Measured Value equals the value on the meter.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9. Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Figure E-3. Sample mA Calibration Screen (HART Device)

Reset Totals
This procedure resets the transmitter totals. The Net, Forward and Reverse Totals are reset as
a group. The Grand Total is individually reset.
1. Select Reset Totals from the Calibration menu or the Reset Totals icon from the
device toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select the device total(s) to reset to zero. You can select Net, Forward, and Reverse
Totals or Grand Total. Then select Continue.

136
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure E-4. Sample IMT25 Reset Totals Screen

4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Pulse Preset
1. Select Pulse Preset from the Test menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Enter a value to set as the pulse rate and select Apply.
4. Select Continue when done testing.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurement.

Reset Change Flag

This function clears the Configuration Changed flag and the historical status information of
the device. It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu.

Master Reset
The execution of this function causes the transmitter to do a master reset. This takes about four
seconds. During this time the device is not able to respond to any command until the execution is
complete and the transmitter latches the output on the last value. The Master Reset function is
accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu.

Acknowledge Alarms
This function enables you to acknowledge an alarm. It is accessed via the Test menu from the
device top level menu.

137
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Acknowledge Prior Diagnostic

This function enables you to acknowledge a diagnostic message. It is accessed via the Test menu
from the device top level menu.

Configuration
NOTE
For IMT25L devices, some configuration parameters do not apply.

Identifier Tab Screen

Figure E-5. Sample IMT25 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters. (Not applicable to HART device).
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I/A Series
Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

138
 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Flow Tab Screen

Figure E-6. Sample IMT25 Flow Tab Screen

Field Entry
Flow Settings
Engineering Units Select from menu of choices or Custom.
Flow Direction Select Positive, Reverse, BiDir Positive, or BiDir Reverse.
Analog and Pulse Enter damping response time from 0.0 to 99.9 seconds.
Rate Output
Damp.
Flow Rate Format Select from menu of eight choices.
Meter Factor Enter “IMT25 Cal Fact” or “Cal Fact*” factor. See IMT25 I/A Series
Magflow Transmitters (MI 021-390).
Output Mode
Digital Select UniDirectional or BiDirectional flow (not applicable to HART device).
Analog Select UniDirectional, Unidirectional Multi-Range, BiDirectional Dual
Range, or BiDirectional Split Range.
Upper Range Values Enter Upper Range Values in units shown.
Pulse Output
Mode Select Off, Pulse Rate, or Pulse Total.

139
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field Entry
Upper Range Value If Pulse Rate mode, enter Pulse Out URV between minimum and
maximum URV of the flowtube (not greater than 999999).
Rate Max If Pulse Rate mode, select Rate Max Frequency of 1000, 2000, 5000, or
Frequency 10000 Hz.
Total Max If Pulse Total mode, select Total Max Frequency of 10 or 100 Hz.
Frequency

Alarms Tab Screen

Figure E-7. Sample IMT25 Alarms Tab Screen

Field Entry
For All Alarms
Alarming Enabled √ = On; Blank = Off.
Clear Alarms Automatically √ = Auto; Blank = Manual.
Blink On Alarm √ = Blink; Blank = Don’t Blink.
Rate Output Response Select No effect, Go Downscale, or Go Upscale.
Alarm Display Definition
High Flow Rate √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point and Deadband.
Low Flow Rate √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point and Deadband.

140
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
High Forward Total 1 √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point.
High Forward Total 2 √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point.
Empty Pipe √ = On; Blank = Off.
Turn On All Turns all alarms on.
Turn Off All Turns all alarms off.

Contacts Tab Screen

Figure E-8. Sample IMT25 Contacts Tab Screen

141
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field Entry
Contacts
Contact 1 Function Select Off, Ack Alarm, Reset Net Total, Reset Gr Total, Reset All
Total, Multi-range, or Signal Lock.
Contact 1 Operation If Contact 1 Function is not Off, select Normally Open or Normally
Closed .
Contact 2 Function Similar to Contact 1 Function.
Contact 2 Operation Similar to Contact 1 Operation.
Relay 1
Relay Function Select Off, Alarm, Alarm & Diag, Diagnostics, Flow Direction, or
Test Mode.
Relay Alarm If Relay Function is not Off, select High Rate, Low Rate,
High Forward Total 1, High Forward Total 2, Empty Pipe, or Any
Alarm.
Relay Operation If Relay Function is not Off, select Normally Open or Normally
Closed .
Suppress Relay If Relay Function is not Off, select Yes to suppress reactivation of an
alarm or No for no suppression.
Relay 2 (Similar to Relay 1)

142
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Options Tab Screen

Figure E-9. Sample IMT25 Options Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tube Identification
Model Code Enter model code of flowtube.
Serial Number Enter serial number of flowtube.
Diagnostics
Rate Response Select Go Downscale or Go Upscale.
Diagnostics
Blink On Diagnostic Error √ = Blink; Blank = Don’t Blink.
Functional Security at the IMT25 Keypad (not applicable to HART device)
Enable Passcode 1 √ = Enable; Blank = Disable. If enabled, select Setup, Totals Reset,
Setup & Totals, Test Mode, Test Mode & Setup, Test Mode and
Totals, or Test Mode, Setup & Totals. Then enter 4 digit passcode.
Enable Passcode 2 Similar to Enable Passcode 1.
Noise Reduction √ = On; Blank = Off.
Empty Pipe Detection √ = On; Blank = Off.
Line Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Empty Pipe Effect Select No Effect or Auto Signal Lock.

143
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Display/Totalizer Tab Screen

Figure E-10. Sample IMT25 Display/Totalizer Tab Screen

Field Entry
Display Preferences
Dual Display On √ = On; Blank = Off.
Display Line 1 If Dual Display On is checked (√ ), select from menu of six
choices.
Display Line 2 If Dual Display On is checked (√ ), select from menu of six
choices.
Default Display Select from menu of seven choices.
Flow Display Damping Enter damping response time for local display between 0.00
and 99.9 seconds.
Totals
Total On √ = On; Blank = Off.
Totalizer Units If Totalizer On is checked (√ ), select Gal, Lit, or Custom.
Format for Grand Total If Totalizer On is checked (√ ), select from menu of eight
choices.
Format for Forward, If Totalizer On is checked (√ ), select from menu of eight
Reverse, and Net Totals choices.

144
Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Database Report
NOTE
If a parameter in the report is “UNUSED,” the corresponding value shown has no
meaning for that device.

Table 14. Sample Database Report

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 29 Tot 1 Alarm Set Poin 3.161953e+007
Tag Number ft102 Tot 2 Alarm On 00
Tag Name IMT25 Tot 2 Alarm Set Poin 4.215937e+007
Device Name DevNam Empty Pipe Detect Al 00
Geo Location lab Rate Response Alarm 02
Date of Manufacture 10/1/97 Display Response Ala 00
Transmitter MS Code IMT25-XMTRMSCODE Alarm Clear 01
Transmitter Serial N XMTRSERNUM012345 Rate Response Diag 00
Tube MS Code 1 TUBEMS Display Response Dia 00
Tube MS Code 2 Contact In 2 Operati Tube Serial Number 55555
Write Protect 00 Passcode 1 On 00
Default Display 02 Pass 1 Protect 00
Dual Display On/Off 00 Passcode 1 8195
Dual Display Line 1 00 Passcode 2 On 00
Dual Display Line 2 00 Pass 2 Protect 01
Rate EGU M1 00 Passcode 2 8195
Flow Rate Units M1 GPM Line Frequency 32
EGU Rate Factor 1 Flow Direction 00
Raw Rate Format 04 Contact In 1 Functio 00
Rate Damping 3.1 Contact In 1 Operati 01
Totalizer On/Off 01 Contact In 2 Functio 00
Rate EGU M2 00 Contact In 2 Operati 01
Total Rate Units M2 Gal Noise Reduction On 01
EGU Totals Slope 1 Empty Pipe Detection 01
Tot/Net Format 05 TON Count (20 mA) 29096
Grand Total Format 04 TON Count (4 mA) 4800
Output Mode 01 Meter Factor Use 1
Digital Mode 00 Cal Date 10/1/97
Analog Mode 00 Cal Name DoneBy
Upper Range Limit #1 20000 mA Hold Value 0
Upper Range Limit #2 50 Pulse Hold 0
Upper Range Limit #3 5 Kernal Major Revisio 00
Pulse Output Mode 01 Kernal Minor Revisio 06
Pulse Out URV 100 SREVMAJ 01
Rate Max Freq 01 SREVMIN 07
Tot Max Freq 00 Display Major Revisi 00
Rate Out Damp 3 Display Minor Revisi 2d
Relay 1 Function 00 Parameter Table Offs b7 74

145
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix E. IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Table 14. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Relay 1 Alarm 00 Parameter Table CRC 0d e5
Relay 1 Operation 01 Parameter Table Type 00
Relay 1 Suppression 00 Parameter Table Size 00 e4
Relay 2 Function 00 Reserved 00 00 00
Relay 2 Alarm 01
Relay 2 Operation 01 REV_INFO c0
Relay 2 Suppression 00 UNUSED 1/10/35
Alarms On 01 Sensor Minor Revisio 02
High Alarm On 00 Sensor Major Revisio 02
High Alarm Set Point 200 UNUSED 65002
High Alarm Deadband 10 UNUSED 65002
Low Alarm On 00 UNUSED ea
Low Alarm Set Point 5 Low Cost Option 00 00
Low Alarm Deadband O 1 Empty Pipe Effect 00
Tot 1 Alarm On 00

146
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass
Flowmeters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the CFT10 Mass Flowmeters in regard to
the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure F-1. Sample CFT10 Device Data Screen

147
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Error Messages
Status Error Messages

Table 15. Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Set if EEPROM write If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
is in progress and does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
pending.
Initializing Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine problem and
Error diagnostic error. corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Tube The tube is partially Check flowmeter and process conditions. Cycle power
Imbalance filled and cannot run. to transmitter.
Tube Failure There is a tube failure. Check flowmeter and process conditions.
Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received a bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Flow Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions.
a flowmeter alarm
condition.
Density Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions.
a flowmeter alarm
condition.
Temperature Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions.
Alarm a flowmeter alarm
condition.

148
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Diagnostic Error Messages

Table 16. Diagnostic Error Messages

Code Error Message Recommended Action

02 ROM Checksum Error Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu to
attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact
the CSC.
03 EEPROM Chksum Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu to
attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
13 EEPROM Write Error Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu to
attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
1F4 Analog Supply Low Analog power supply voltage is low. Contact the CSC.
1F5 Analog Supply High Analog power supply voltage is high. Contact the CSC.
1F6 Drive Supply Low Drive power supply voltage is low. Contact the CSC.
1F7 Drive Supply High Drive power supply voltage is high. Contact the CSC.
258 Proc Brd Temp Low The processor PWA temperature is too low.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or adjust
the temperature.
259 Proc Brd Temp High The processor PWA temperature is too high.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or adjust
the temperature.
25A Cur Brd Temp Low The current PWA temperature is too low.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or adjust
the temperature.
25B Cur Brd Temp High The current PWA temperature is too high.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or adjust
the temperature.
2BC Sensor Stalled Signal received from flowtube sensors is below minimum
required level. Measurement invalid. Contact the CSC.
2BD Tube Imbalance An imbalance has been detected between sensors in the
flowtube. Transmitter switches off-line. All measurement
stops. Contact the CSC.
320 RTD Meas Below Min Resistance for temperature measurement is below minimum
required. Measurements invalid. Contact the CSC.
321 RTD Meas Above Max Resistance for temperature measurement is above maximum
allowed. Measurements invalid. Contact the CSC.

149
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Table 16. Diagnostic Error Messages (Continued)

Code Error Message Recommended Action

322 Osc. Freq High Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is above the maximum
allowed. Measurements invalid. Contact the CSC.
323 Osc. Freq Low Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is below the minimum
required. Measurements invalid. Contact the CSC.
324 Phase Diff High Excessive signal phase difference between sensors. Flow
measurement and total invalid. Confirm that mass flow rate
does not exceed maximum mass flow rate of flowtube.
Contact the CSC.
384 Process Temp Low Process temperature below lower flowmeter limit. Adjust
process temperature.
385 Process Temp High Process temperature exceeds upper flowmeter limit. Adjust
process temperature.
386 Process Dens Low Process density below lower flowmeter limit. Adjust process
density.
387 Process Dens High Process density exceeds upper flowmeter limit. Adjust process
density.
388 Flow Over Rev Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the reverse direction. Adjust
process or calibration limit, as required.
389 Flow Over Fwd Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the forward direction.
Adjust process or calibration limit, as required.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an CFT10 Mass Flowmeter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ ReZero transmitter
♦ mA Calibration
♦ Restore Factory mA Calibration
♦ Startup Zero
♦ Zero Total.

ReZero Transmitter
This function permits you to reset the zero point for the transmitter. To set the zero on initial
installation of your transmitter, see “Startup Zero” on page 151. The procedure to perform the
ReZero function follows:
1. Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue.

150
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure F-2. Sample CFT10 ReZero Calibration Screen

4. Wait while the device is calibrating. When this has occurred, the new flow zero offset
is shown. Save this calibration to the device by selecting Continue.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Startup Zero
This function is used to set the zero only on initial installation of the transmitter. After the initial
installation is complete, use “This function permits you to reset the zero point for the transmitter.
To set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter, see “Startup Zero” on page 151. The
procedure to perform the ReZero function follows:” on page 150 to reset the zero. The procedure
to set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter is as follows:
1. Select Startup Zero from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue. The Startup Zero screen is
similar to the ReZero Calibration screen shown in Figure F-2.
4. Wait for the first of three phases of the Startup Zero calibration to occur. When the
first phase has been completed, select Continue to resume the procedure.
5. Wait for the second phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur. When the second
phase has been completed, select Continue to resume the procedure.
6. Wait for the third phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur. When the third
phase has been completed, the zero flow offset value is shown. Save this calibration to
the transmitter by selecting Continue.
7. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

151
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Zero Total
This function sets the transmitter total measurement to zero. The procedure to do this is as
follows:
1. Select Zero Total from the Calibration menu or the Zero Total icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select Continue again to reset the transmitter total measurement to zero.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Restore Factory mA
This function restores the factory mA calibration to the transmitter. The procedure to perform
this function is as follows:
1. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select Restore Factory 4-20 mA Settings from the mA Calibration screen (see
Figure F-3) and then select Continue. The factory calibration is restored.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
NOTE
From the mA Calibration screen you can also restore the factory 4 to 20 mA
settings. This does not require insertion of a meter in the loop wiring.

The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is:

1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.
5. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.2, -0.02, -0.002, 0.002, 0.02, 0.2), and select
Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen display.
7. Select 20 mA Output.

152
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.

9. Select Continue to save the calibration to the device.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Figure F-3. Sample CFT10 mA Calibration Screen

153
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure F-4. Sample CFT10 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

154
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Units Tab Screen

Figure F-5. Sample CFT10 Units Tab Screen

Field Entry
Measurement
Mass Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
Density Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
Temperature Units Select R, F, C, K, or Custom.
Volume Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
Totalization
Total By Select Mass or Volume.
Total Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
On Slug Select Run Total or Stop Total.
Total Select from menu of choices.

155
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Pulse Output Tab Screen

Figure F-6. Sample CFT10 Pulse Output Tab Screen

Field Entry
Pulse Mode Select Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Total,
Vol. Flow, % Solids, Preset, or Off.
Lower Range Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow, Density,
Temperature, Vol. Flow, or % Solids.
Upper Range Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow, Density,
Temperature, Vol. Flow, or % Solids.
Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds.
Pulse Trip Enter value if Pulse mode is Total.
Preset Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Preset.
Totalize Option Select 5 Hz, 10 Hz, 15 Hz or Off.

156
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

mA Mode Tab Screen

Figure F-7. Sample CFT10 mA Mode Tab Screen

Field Entry
mA Source If Pulse Current is 4-20 mA, select Mass Flow, Density,
Temperature, Vol. Flow, % Solids, Preset, or Off.
If Pulse Current is 0-20 mA, select Density, Temperature, Vol.
Flow, or % Solids.
mA Range Select 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.
Lower Range Value Enter value if mA Source is Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol.
Flow, or % Solids.
Upper Range Value Enter value if mA Source is Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol.
Flow, or % Solids.
Damping If mA Source is Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol. Flow, or %
Solids, select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds.
Preset Value Enter value if mA Source is Preset.

157
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Alarms Tab Screen

Figure F-8. Sample CFT10 Alarms Tab Screen

Field Entry
Alarm 1
Type Select Preset Off, Preset On, Mass Flow High, Mass Flow Low,
Density High, Density Low, Temp High, Temp Low, Volume
Flow High, Volume Flow Low,% Solids High, % Solids Low,
Pulse Overrun, or Fault Only.
Alarm on Faults √ = Enable; Blank = Disable.
Power Select to power alarm contact on alarm or when no alarm exists.
Level Enter value if Alarm Type is Mass Flow High, Mass Flow Low,
Density High, Density Low, Temp High, Temp Low, Volume Flow
High, Volume Flow Low, % Solids High, or % Solids Low.
Hysteresis Enter value if Alarm Type is Mass Flow High, Mass Flow Low,
Density High, Density Low, Temp High, Temp Low, Volume Flow
High, Volume Flow Low, % Solids High, or % Solids Low.
Alarm 2 (Similar to Alarm 1)

158
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Solids Configuration Tab Screen

Figure F-9. Sample CFT10 Solids Configuration Tab Screen

Field Entry
Component A
Tag Enter maximum of six characters. Not configurable using IFDC.
Density Enter value.
Thermal Expansion Enter value.
Component B (Similar to Component A)
Mode Settings
% Solids Select % A by Mass, % B by Mass, % A by Vol, or % B by Vol.
Mass Flow Select Comp A, Comp B, or Comp A + B.
Volume Flow Select Comp A, Comp B, or Comp A + B.
Total Select Comp A, Comp B, or Comp A + B.
General Settings
Flow Direction Select Forward , Positive Bi-directional, Negative Bi-
directional, or Reverse.
Slug Time Enter allowable time for flow slug to exist before alarm is triggered.
Specify in multiples of 10 seconds from 10 to 2550 seconds.
Reference Temp Enter value.

159
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen

Figure F-10. Sample CFT10 Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen

Field Entry
Sensor I.D.
Density Coef 1
Density Coef 2
Density Coef 3
Density Coef 4
Enter data from flowtube data plate.
Nominal Capacity
Flow Coef 1
Flow Coef 2
Flow Coef 3
Flow Coef 4

160
Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Database Report
Table 17. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type 20 Neg Phase Cal 3 0
Tag Number TEST TAG NUM Neg Phase Cal 4 0
Tag Name CORIOLIS METER RTD Res to Temp 1 0
Device Name COR001 RTD Res to Temp 2 40
Geo Location DEFAULT LOCAT. RTD Res to Temp 3 0
Mass Flow Units kg/s RTD Res to Temp 4 0
Density Units kg/m3 I/Pulse Width 1 0
Temperature Units K I/Pulse Width 2 1
Total Units kg I/Pulse Width 3 0
Vol Flow Units l/s I/Pulse Width 4 0
Comp A Label COMP A Clock Calibration 5e-007
Comp B Label COMP B Xmtr Serial Num 1
Slug Flow (/10) 06 Xmtr Manuf Plant 1a
Pulse Out Slope 1 Cur Slope Trim 1
Pulse Out Offset 0 Cur Offset Trim 0
Current Out Slope 1 Dbase Chng Count ff
Current Out Offset 0 Rollover Total 10000
Mass Flow Slope 1 Init Required 00
Density Slope 1 Processor Brd Temp 89
Temperature Slope 1 Current Brd Temp 88
Total Slope 1 RTD Ohms 83.31393
Vol Flow Slope 1000 Device Type 20
Mass Flow Offset 0 Xmtr Serial No 1
Density Offset 0 Plant Code 1a
Temperature Offset 0 Major Rev Number 30 34
Total Offset 0 Minor Rev Number 30 30
Vol Flow Offset 0 Firmware Update No 30 30 30
Density Comp A 800 Diagnostic Error 00 00
Density Comp B 1200 Totalize Option 02
Density Ref Temp 0
Thermal Exp A 02
Thermal Exp B 0
Pulse Out Control 0e
Current Out Control 07
Alarm 1 Control 02
Alarm 2 Control 04
Gen Func Cntrl 1 00
Gen Func Cntrl 2 00
Pulse Out Preset 0.5
Current Out Preset 0.5
Alarm 1 Level 300
Alarm 2 Level 30
Alarm 1 Hysteresis 50

161
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix F. CFT10 Mass Flowmeters

Table 17. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Alarm 2 Hysteresis 5
Flow Zero Offset 0
Tube Serial No. 1
Dens Coef 1 0
Dens Coef 2 10000
Dens Coef 3 0
Dens Coef 4 0
Nominal Capacity 1000
Flow Coef 1 0
Flow Coef 2 1
Flow Coef 3 0
Flow Coef 4 1
Dens Coef 5 0
Dens Coef 6 0
Temp Cor Slope 1
Temp Cor Offset 0
Phase In Cal 1 0
Phase In Cal 2 1
Phase In Cal 3 0
Phase In Cal 4 0
Neg Phase Cal 1 0
Neg Phase Cal 2 1

162
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass
Flowmeters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the CFT15 Mass Flowmeters in regard to
the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.
NOTE
The CFT15 transmitter is a Modbus device which is not supported by IFDC
running on I/A Series stations. The PC20 does support configuration and
calibration of the CFT15.

Device Data Screen

Figure G-1. Sample CFT15 Device Data Screen

163
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Error Messages
Status Error Messages

Table 18. Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
DeviceBusy Set if EEPROM write If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
is in progress and does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
pending.
Initializing Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine problem and
Error diagnostic error. corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Tube The tube is partially Check flowmeter and process conditions. Cycle power
Imbalance filled and cannot run. to transmitter.
Tube Failure There is a tube failure. Check flowmeter and process conditions.
Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Flow Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions.
a flowmeter alarm
condition.
Density Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions.
a flowmeter alarm
condition.
Temperature Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions.
Alarm a flowmeter alarm
condition.

164
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Diagnostic Error Messages

Table 19. Diagnostic Error Messages

Code Error Message Recommended Action

02 IOP ROM Checksum Error Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu
to attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
03 IOP EEPROM Chksum Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu
to attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
06 EOP ROM Chksum Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu
to attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
07 EOP EEPROM Chksum Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu
to attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
13 IOP EEPROM Write Error Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu
to attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
14 EOP EEPROM Write Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad/display (if so
equipped) while viewing fault from Device Status menu
to attempt to clear message. If message persists, contact the
CSC.
1F4 Analog Supply Low Analog power supply voltage is low. Contact the CSC.
1F5 Analog Supply High Analog power supply voltage is high. Contact the CSC.
1F6 Drive Supply Low Drive power supply voltage is low. Contact the CSC.
1F7 Drive Supply High Drive power supply voltage is high. Contact the CSC.
258 Proc Brd Temp Low The processor PWA temperature is too low.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or
adjust the temperature.
259 Proc Brd Temp High The processor PWA temperature is too high.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or
adjust the temperature.
25A Cur Brd Temp Low The current PWA temperature is too low.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or
adjust the temperature.

165
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Table 19. Diagnostic Error Messages (Continued)

Code Error Message Recommended Action

25B Cur Brd Temp High The current PWA temperature is too high.
Measurements are invalid. Relocate the transmitter or
adjust the temperature.
2BC Sensor Stalled Signal received from flowtube sensors is below minimum
required level. Measurement invalid. Contact the CSC.
2BD Tube Imbalance An imbalance has been detected between sensors in the
flowtube. Transmitter switches off-line. All measurement
stops. Contact the CSC.
2BE IPL Comms Failure Contact the CSC.
320 RTD Meas Below Min Resistance for temperature measurement is below
minimum required. Measurements invalid. Contact the
CSC.
321 RTD Meas Above Max Resistance for temperature measurement is above
maximum allowed. Measurements invalid. Contact the
CSC.
322 Osc. Freq High Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is above the
maximum allowed. Measurements invalid. Contact the
CSC.
323 Osc. Freq Low Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is below the
minimum required. Measurements invalid. Contact the
CSC.
324 Phase Diff High Excessive signal phase difference between sensors. Flow
measurement and total invalid. Confirm that mass flow rate
does not exceed maximum mass flow rate of flowtube.
Contact the CSC.
384 Process Temp Low Process temperature below lower flowmeter limit. Adjust
process temperature.
385 Process Temp High Process temperature exceeds upper flowmeter limit. Adjust
process temperature.
386 Process Dens Low Process density below lower flowmeter limit. Adjust process
density.
387 Process Dens High Process density exceeds upper flowmeter limit. Adjust
process density.
388 Flow Over Rev Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the reverse direction.
Adjust process or calibration limit, as required.
389 Flow Over Fwd Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the forward direction.
Adjust process or calibration limit, as required.

166
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an CFT15 Mass Flowmeter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ ReZero Transmitter
♦ Startup Zero
♦ Zero Total.

ReZero Transmitter
This function permits you to reset the zero point for the transmitter at zero flow conditions. To
set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter, see “Startup Zero” on page 168.
The transmitter samples 300 flow readings during the procedure. Prior to beginning the
procedure, connect the transmitter to the flowtube and fill the flowtube with the fluid to be
measured. Then, flush out the flowtube for approximately five minutes to eliminate air in the
system piping.
The procedure to perform the ReZero function is as follows:
1. Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue.
4. Wait for the new zero flow offset to be determined. When this has occurred, the new
value is shown. Save this calibration to the transmitter by selecting Continue.

Figure G-2. Sample CFT15 ReZero Calibration Screen

5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

167
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Startup Zero
This function is used to set the zero only on initial installation of the transmitter. At other times,
use “ReZero Transmitter” on page 167 to reset the zero.
The transmitter samples 300 flow readings during the procedure. Prior to beginning the
procedure, connect the transmitter to the flowtube and fill the flowtube with the fluid to be
measured. Then, flush out the flowtube for approximately five minutes to eliminate air in the
system piping.
The procedure to perform the Startup Zero function is as follows:
1. Select Startup Zero from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue. The Startup Zero screen is
similar to the ReZero Calibration screen shown in Figure G-2.
4. Wait for the first phase (of three) of the Startup Zero calibration to occur. When
phase 1 has been completed, select Continue to resume the procedure.
5. Wait for the second phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur. When phase 2 has
been completed, select Continue to resume the procedure.
6. Wait for the third phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur. When phase 3 has
been completed, the zero flow offset value is shown. Save this calibration to the
transmitter by selecting Continue.
7. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Zero Total
This function sets the transmitter total measurement to zero. The procedure follows:
1. Select Zero Total from the Calibration menu or the Zero Total icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select Continue again to reset the transmitter total measurement to zero.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

168
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure G-3. Sample CFT15 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

169
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Units Tab Screen

Figure G-4. Sample CFT15 Units Tab Screen

Field Entry
Measurement
Mass Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
Density Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
Temperature Units Select R, F, C, K, or Custom.
Volume Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
Totalization
Total By Select By Mass or By Volume.
Total Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom.
On Slug Select Run Total or Stop Total.
Total Format Select from menu of choices.

170
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Outputs Tab Screen

Figure G-5. Sample CFT15 Outputs Tab Screen

Field Entry
Pulse Output
Pulse Mode Select Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Total, Volumetric Flow, %
Solids, Preset, or Off.
Pulse Trip Enter value if Pulse mode is Total.
Upper Range Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol. Flow, or
% Solids.
Lower Range Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol. Flow, or
% Solids.
Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds if Pulse mode
is Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol. Flow, or % Solids.
Totalize Option Select 5 Hz, 10 Hz, 15 Hz or Off.
Preset Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Preset.
Alarm 1
Type Select from menu of choices.
Level Enter value if Alarm Type is not Preset On, Preset Off, Pulse Overrun, or
Fault Only.

171
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Field Entry
Hysteresis Enter value if Alarm Type is not Preset On, Preset Off, Pulse Overrun, or
Fault Only.
While Alarm On √ = Activates when alarm condition exists;
Blank = Does not activate when alarm condition exists.
On Fault √ = Activates when fault condition occurs
Blank = Does not activate when fault condition occurs.
Alarm 2 (Similar to Alarm 1)

Current Tab Screen

Figure G-6. Sample CFT15 Current Tab Screen

172
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
4-20 mA - Output 1
mA Mode Select Mass Flow, Density, Temperature, Vol. Flow, %
Solids, Preset, or Off.
Upper Range Enter value if mA Mode is not Off or Preset.
Lower Range Enter value if mA Mode is not Off or Preset.
Damp If mA Mode is not Off or Preset, select one of eight choices
from no damping to 16 seconds.
Preset Enter value if mA Mode is Preset.
4-20 mA - Output 2 (Similar to 4-20 mA Output 1).
4-20 mA - Output 3 (Similar to 4-20 mA Output 1).

Solids Tab Screen

Figure G-7. Sample CFT15 Solids Tab Screen

173
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Field Entry
Component A
Tag Enter maximum of six characters.
Density Enter value.
Thermal Expansion Enter value.
Component B (Similar to Component A).
Mode Settings
% Solids Select % A by Mass, % B by Mass, % A by Vol, or % B by Vol.
Mass Flow Select Comp A Only, Comp B Only, or Comp A + B.
Volume Flow Select Comp A Only, Comp B Only, or Comp A + B.
Total Select Comp A Only, Comp B Only, or Comp A + B.
General Settings
Flow Direction Select Forward , Positive BiDirect, Negative BiDirect, or Reverse.
Slug Time Enter allowable time for flow slug to exist before alarm is triggered.
Specify in multiples of 10 seconds from 10 to 2550 seconds.
Ref Temp Enter value.

Flowtube Tab Screen

Figure G-8. Sample CFT15 Flowtube Tab Screen

174
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Sensor I.D.
Density Coef 1
Density Coef 2
Density Coef 3
Density Coef 4
Enter data from flowtube data plate.
Nominal Capacity
Flow Coef 1
Flow Coef 2
Flow Coef 3
Flow Coef 4

Modbus Tab Screen

Figure G-9. Sample CFT15 Modbus Tab Screen

Field Entry
Address Enter address from 1 to 247.
Baud Rate Select 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, or 19.2 kb/second.
Delay Select 0, 20, 50, 150, or 300.
Parity Select Odd, Even, or None.

175
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

Database Report
Table 20. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type 21 Curr 1 I/Pulse 3 0
Tag Number TEST TAG NUM Curr 1 I/Pulse 4 0
Tag Name CORIOLIS METER Curr 2 I/Pulse 1 0
Device Name COR001 Curr 2 I/Pulse 2 1
Geo Location DEFAULT LOCAT. Curr 2 I/Pulse 3 0
Mass Flow Units kg/s Curr 2 I/Pulse 4 0
Density Units kg/m3 Curr 3 I/Pulse 1 0
Temperature Units K Curr 3 I/Pulse 2 1
Total Units kg Curr 3 I/Pulse 3 0
Vol Flow Units l/s Curr 3 I/Pulse 4 0
Comp A Label COMP A Clock Calibration 5e-007
Comp B Label COMP B Xmtr Serial Num 1
Slug Flow (/10) 06 Xmtr Manuf Plant 00
Pulse Out Slope 1 Dbase Chng Count ff
Pulse Out Offset 0 Init Required 00
Mass Flow Slope 1 Processor Brd Temp 9c
Density Slope 1 Current Brd Temp 99
Temperature Slope 1 RTD Ohms 191.9533
Total Slope 1 Totalize Option 82
Vol Flow Slope 1000 Modbus Address f7
Mass Flow Offset 0 Modbus Baudrate 03
Density Offset 0 Modbus Delay Time 00
Temperature Offset 0 Modbus Parity 02
Total Offset 0 Current 1 Control 01
Vol Flow Offset 0 Current 1 Slope 1
Density Comp A 800 Current 1 Offset 0
Density Comp B 1200 Current 1 Preset 0.5
Density Ref Temp 0 Current 2 Control 01
Thermal Exp A 0 Current 2 Slope 1
Thermal Exp B 0 Current 2 Offset 0
Pulse Out Control 01 Current 2 Preset 0.5
Alarm 1 Control 02 Current 3 Control 01
Alarm 2 Control 04 Current 3 Slope 1
Gen Func Cntrl 1 00 Current 3 Offset 0
Gen Func Cntrl 2 00 Current 3 Preset 0.5
Pulse Out Preset 0.5 Slug Recovery 0
Alarm 1 Level 300 Device Type 21
Alarm 2 Level 30 Xmtr Serial No 1
Alarm 1 Hysteresis 50 Plant Code 00
Alarm 2 Hysteresis 5 Major Rev Number 30 31
Flow Zero Offset 0 Minor Rev Number 30 35
Tube Serial No. 1 Firmware Update No 30 30 30
Dens Coef 1 0 Diagnostic Error 00 00

176
Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 20. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Dens Coef 2 10000 Format code for TOTA 00
Dens Coef 3 0
Dens Coef 4 0
Nominal Capacity 1000
Flow Coef 1 0
Flow Coef 2 1
Flow Coef 3 0
Flow Coef 4 1
Phase In Cal 1 0
Phase In Cal 2 1
Phase In Cal 3 0
Phase In Cal 4 0
Neg Phase Cal 1 0
Neg Phase Cal 2 1
Neg Phase Cal 3 0
Neg Phase Cal 4 0
RTD Res to Temp 1 0
RTD Res to Temp 2 40
RTD Res to Temp 3 0
RTD Res to Temp 4 0
Curr 1 I/Pulse 1 0
Curr 1 I/Pulse 2 1

177
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix G. CFT15 Mass Flowmeters

178
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex
Flowmeters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the Foxboro Vortex Flowmeters in regard
to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.
NOTE
Version 2.0 of the IFDC/PC20 software incorporates full configuration capability
for the HART 83 Series Vortex Transmitters. Any HART 83 Series database saved
to your computer hard disk for Version 1.0 is not usable for Version 2.0. Therefore,
delete Version 1.0 files and save new files from your transmitter using Version 2.0
software.

Device Data Screen

Figure H-1. Sample Vortex Device Data Screen (FoxCom Device)

179
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Figure H-2. Sample Vortex Device Data Screen (HART Device)

Error Messages
Status Error Messages

Table 21. Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-line. If this
does not clear problem, cycle power and if necessary
replace the electronic module.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, cycle power and if necessary
replace the electronic module.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Error
Error diagnostic error. Messages to determine problem and corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Device Busy Set if EEPROM If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
write is in progress does not clear problem, cycle power and if necessary
and pending. replace the electronic module.

180
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 21. Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test > Go On-line. If this does not clear
Received a bad message. problem, cycle power and if necessary replace the
electronic module.
Electronics Electronics cannot Select Test > Go On-line. If this does not clear
Error calculate correct flow. problem, cycle power and if necessary replace the
electronic module.
Sensor Output
High
Temp Out of Transmitter temperature Check ambient and process temperature.
Range is less than -40°C or
higher than 80°C.

Diagnostic Error Messages

Table 22. Diagnostic Error Messages

Code Error Message Recommended Action

02 ROM Checksum Error Replace electronic module.
03 EEPROM Chksum Err If this does not clear problem, replace electronic
module.
04 RAM Error Replace electronic module.
0A Flowrate Math Error Check transmitter database and correct any problems. If
problem persists, replace electronic module.
0C Sensor Elec Failure Cycle power. If problem persists, replace electronic
module.
0E Core Failure Cycle power. If problem persists, replace electronic
module.
2F Offline Cfg Write Error Take transmitter off-line, modify a parameter or mode,
change parameter or mode back to previous value and
place transmitter on-line.
10 Core Failure Cycle power. If problem persists, replace electronic
module.
28 Xmtr Temp Low Check process temperature.
29 Xmtr Temp High Check process temperature.

181
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on a Vortex Transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ ReRange
♦ Zero Total
♦ Set Low Flow Cut-In
♦ mA Calibration.

ReRange
This function permits you to change the Flow Upper Range Value (URV).
1. Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue.
3. To rerange to another input span, enter the desired upper range value and select
Continue.
4. Select Continue again to save the new range to the device.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

Figure H-3. Sample Vortex ReRange Screen

182
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Zero Total
This function permits you to reset the transmitter total to zero. The procedure follows:
1. Select Zero Total from the Calibration menu or the Zero Total icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue.
3. Select Continue again to reset the transmitter total measurement to zero.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

Set Low Flow Cut-In

This function permits you to set the low flow cut-in level for the transmitter. You can also set a
manual low flow cut-in level. To execute the operation, use the following procedure:
1. Select Low Flow Cut-In from the Calibration menu or the Low Flow Cut-In icon
from the device toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue.
3. For a FoxCom device, select the desired Low Flow Cut-In value or select Automatic
to set low flow cut-in to lowest setting with no false signal detected under no flow
conditions. Select Continue when done.
For a HART device, select Increment or Decrement to obtain the desired Low
Flow Cut-In value or select Automatic to set low flow cut-in to lowest setting with
no false signal detected under no flow conditions. Select Continue when done.
NOTE
Before selecting Automatic, it is important that flow be stopped.

Figure H-4. Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut-In Screen (FoxCom Device)

183
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Figure H-5. Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut-In Screen (HART Device)

4. Wait while the new Low Flow Cut-In value is set.

5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required.
However, the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the
output to the output of a specific receiving device.

FoxCom Device
The procedure to perform a mA Calibration on a FoxCom device is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
1. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue.
3. Select 4 mA Output.
4. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select
Apply.
5. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen display.
6. Select 20 mA Output.
7. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
8. The screen then displays the adjustment. To accept this change, select Continue.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode. Select
Continue to resume dynamic measurement.

184
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure H-6. Sample Vortex mA Calibration Screen (FoxCom Device)

HART Device
The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration on a HART device is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.
5. Enter the value from the mA meter in the Measured Value field on your screen and
select Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until the Measured Value equals the value on the meter.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9. Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

185
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Figure H-7. Sample mA Calibration Screen (HART Device)

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure H-8. Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)

186
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters with a FoxCom device.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I/A Series
Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only
with FoxCom device.

Figure H-9. Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen (HART Device)

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Date Enter maximum of 10 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Message Enter message. Optional, used for reference only.

187
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Flow Parameters Tab Screen

Figure H-10. Sample Vortex Flow Parameters Tab Screen

Field Entry
Flow Meter (Sensor) Model Enter Model Number.
Reference K-Factor Enter Reference K-Factor.
Meter Serial Number Shows Serial Number (if HART device).
Measurement
Fluid Type Select Liquid, Gas, or Steam.
Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of the flowmeter.
Low Flow Correct Specify On or Off.
Measurement Units Select from menu of flow units or select Custom to enter user-
configured units.
Upper Range Value Enter Upper Range Value in measurement units shown.
Low Flow Cut-In Select from menu of values.
Flowing Parameters
Temperature Enter temperature in units shown.
Density Enter density in units shown. Defaults are Liquid: 62.30, Gas:
0.5858, and Steam: 0.2992 lb/ft3.

188
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
K-Factor Shows K-Factor in units shown.
Viscosity If liquid, enter viscosity.
Base Density If gas, enter value in same units as Density (above).
Added K Bias Enter value in percent.
Units Base Select English or Metric.

Options and Piping Tab Screen

Figure H-11. Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen (FoxCom Device)

189
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Figure H-12. Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen (HART Device)

Field Entry
Piping
Mating Select Schedule 10, Schedule 40, Schedule 80, PN16, PN40,
PN64, or PN100.
Configuration Select from menu of piping configurations.
Upstream Distance If Configuration is not Straight, enter distance in pipe
diameters.
Options
Noise Rejection Select On or Off.
Signal Conditioning Select On or Off.
Failsafe If Output Mode is Analog, select Downscale or Upscale.
Damping Select one of nine choices from No Damping through 32
seconds.
Scaled Pulse Output Select Off or URV 100 Hz.
Output Mode (FoxCom) Select Digital or 4-20 mA.
Output Mode (HART) Select Analog (4-20 mA) or Multidrop.
Polling Address If Multidrop, select number from 0 through 15.
Pulse Resolution Select 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 100.0, or 1000.0.

190
Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Database Report
Table 23. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 33 REV_INFO bd
Tag Number DEFAULT IGN2 1/22/23
Tag Name TAG_NAME Sensor Minor Rev # 00
Device Name DevNam Sensor Major Rev # 02
Geo Location LOCATION IGN3 256
Reference Number Some serno val IGN4 150
Model Code 83F-D02S1SSTNZ IGN5 89
Core Number 02 0c
Core Manufact. Date 2/10/97
Flow Meas Units USgpm
Total Meas Units USgal
Upper Range Value 232.7
Lower Range Value 0
Low Flow Cut In 2.32683
Upper Range Limit 232.683
Low Flow Cut In Set 0
Reference K-Factor 258
Meas #1 Damping 0
Flow Units Slope 448.83
Total Units Slope 7.48052
Pulse Resolution 3
Meas #1 EGU Type 00
Fluid Type 00
Temperature Units 00
Flowing Temperature 70
Density Units 00
Flowing Density 62.3
Base Density 62.37
Viscosity Units 00
Fluid Viscosity 0.9753
Mating Pipe 1
Added K-Fac. Bias 0
Piping Configuration 00
Upstream Distance 30
Piping Bias 0
Output Mode 00
Strategy Flag 08
Scaled Pulse Output 00
Noise Rejection 01
Signal Conditioning 01
Low Flow Correction 00
Flowing K-Factor 34.48958

191
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix H. 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Table 23. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Lo Freq Filter 65535
Hi Freq Filter 65535
Calibrator’s Initial NOTYOU
Calibration Date 7/24/98
TON Count (20 mA) 33600
TON Count (4 mA) 8162
Measurement Mapping 01 01 02 03
Local Disp Password VORTEX
Database Change Flag 62
Kernal Major Rev # 01
Kernal Minor Rev # 00
SREVMAJ 01
SREVMIN 0a
Display Major Rev # 00
Display Minor Rev # 00
Parameter Tbl Offset aa cf
Parameter Table CRC 2d 94
Parameter Table Type 00
Parameter Table Size 00 85
Reserved 00 00 00
Manifold Setting 1
Slave Revision Numbe 259

192
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 870ITEC transmitters in regard to the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure I-1. Sample 870ITEC Device Data Screen

193
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Error Messages
Table 24. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select
Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select
initializing on Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
reset. problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Error Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine
diagnostic error. problem and corrective action.
Secondary Status Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in
Error secondary status. Column 2 of the screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Measurement Unstable process Check sensor connection. Select Test >
Error measurement. Go On-Line. If this does not clear problem,
contact the CSC.
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test >
Go On-Line. If this does not clear problem,
contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not
Received a bad message. clear problem, contact the CSC.
Stability Error Raw measurement has Check wiring. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
been unstable. this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Probe Error Problem with the sensor. Replace sensor.
Temp Comp Error Problem in temperature Check ATC connection. Verify process
measurement. temperature. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Amplifier Error Out of range error. Check sensor. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Extended Status - Hardware
ATC Open Resistance of temperature Replace temperature compensator.
ATC Short compensation is greater or less
than expected resistance
of device configured.
Leak Error Solution leakage into sensor. Replace sensor.
App1 Cal Req Application 1 calibration Calibrate.
required.

194
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 24. Transmitter Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

App2 Cal Req Application 2 calibration Calibrate.
required.
App3 Cal Req Application 3 calibration Calibrate.
required.
Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem in Recalibrate the transmitter. If problem
the previous calibration. persists, contact the CSC.
Cal Slope Error A slope error has occurred as Check sensor and recalibrate transmitter If
the result of the previous the problem persists, contact the CSC.
calibration.
RTD Cal RTD calibration is not Recalibrate the RTD. If problem persists,
Tolerance within tolerance. contact the CSC.
Therm Cal Thermistor calibration Recalibrate the thermistor. If problem
Tolerance is not within tolerance. persists, contact the CSC.
Tune Stability Calibration measurement Check stability configuration or replace
not stabilized. sensor.
Amp Failure Overrange condition on Check sensor and transmitter connections.
raw measurement. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not
clear problem, contact the CSC.
Extended Status - Process
mA Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure range or correct process error.
mA Over Range over configured range.
Comp Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure compensation or correct process
Comp Over Range over compensation range. error.
Disp Under Range Primary measurement Check sensor connection. Select Test > Go
Disp Over Range is too low or too high. On-Line. If this does not clear problem,
contact the CSC.
Unstable Temp Unstable temperature Check ATC connection. Verify process
measurement. temperature. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Unstable Meas Unstable process Check measurement sensor connection.
measurement. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not
clear problem, contact the CSC.

195
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 870ITEC transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ Bench Calibration
♦ Solution 1-Point Span
♦ Solution 1-Point Offset
♦ Solution 2-Point
♦ Temperature Sensor
♦ mA Calibration.

Bench Calibration
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration
function. See page 203.
2. Select Bench Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure I-2. Sample 870ITEC Bench Calibration Screen

4. Enter the high and low solution values and the calibrator’s initials, and select
Continue.
5. Place the clean dry sensor in air and select Continue.
6. Wait while the device is calibrating.

196
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

7. Run a wire through the sensor bore and connect to a decade resistance box. Adjust the
box to a resistance equal to the high calibration point [see 870ITEC Electrodeless
Conductivity Transmitters (MI 611-212) for calculation of this resistance] and select
Continue.
8. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Solution 1-Point Offset

This option permits you to set a 1-point offset for up to three applications and is normally used to
correct for zero shift. This should be used only if you have previously performed a 2-point
calibration.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration
function. See page 203.
2. Select Solution 1-Point Offset from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure I-3. Sample 870ITEC Solution 1-Point Offset Screen

4. Enter the solution value and the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
6. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.

197
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

7. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Solution 1-Point Span

This option permits you to set a calibration point (1-point span) for up to three applications. This
is usually done to correct for a cell factor change due to installation. It should be used only if you
have previously performed a 2-point calibration.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration
function. See page 203.
2. Select Solution 1-Point Span from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure I-4. Sample 870ITEC Solution 1-Point Span Screen

4. Enter the solution value and the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
6. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
7. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

198
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Solution 2-Point
This option permits you to perform a 2-point calibration for up to three applications.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration
function. See page 203.
2. Select Solution 2-Point from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure I-5. Sample 870ITEC Solution 2-Point Calibration Screen

4. Enter the low and high solution values and the calibrator’s initials, and select
Continue.
5. Immerse the sensor in the low calibration solution and select Continue.
6. Wait while the device is calibrating.
7. Immerse the sensor in the high calibration solution and select Continue.
8. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

199
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Temperature Sensor Calibration

This option permits you to calibrate the temperature sensor to the known temperature of a
solution.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration
function. See page 203.
2. Select Temperature Sensor from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure I-6. Sample 870ITEC Temperature Calibration

4. Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
6. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

200
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

4. Select 4 mA Output.

Figure I-7. Sample 870ITEC mA Calibration Screen

5. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select
Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
in the screen.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

201
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure I-8. Sample 870ITEC Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters
become the transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.

202
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Sensor Tab Screen

Figure I-9. Sample 870ITEC Sensor Tab Screen

Field Entry
Sensor Configuration
Applications Number of applications to be configured. Select 1, 2, or 3
applications.
Application Select Select 1, 2, 3 or AUTO.
Sensor Type Select type of sensor from menu of choices.
Cell Factor If sensor type is OTHER, specify cell factor between 00.00 and
99.99.
Outputs
mA Output Mode Select Digital or 4-20 mA.
Damping Select damping response time of 1, 5, 10, 20, 40, or
120 seconds.

203
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Measurement Tab Screen

Figure I-10. Sample 870ITEC Measurement Tab Screen

Field Entry
Temperature
Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Mode Select Automatic (follows RTD) or Manual (fixed point).
Failure Value If Mode is Automatic, enter temperature in case RTD fails.
Manual Temperature If Mode is Manual, enter temperature.
Temperature Sensor Select 2-wire 100 Ω, 2-wire 1000 Ω, 3-wire 100 Ω, or 3-wire 1000
Ω RTD, or 100 kΩ. thermistor.
Measurement Stability
Measurement Stability √ = Instrument Stability Measurement Feature On;
Active Blank = Instrument Stability Measurement Feature Off.
Stability Time If on, enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5-second increments.
Stability Variant If on, enter variant between 1 and 9.
Temperature Stability
Temperature Stability √ = Instrument Stability Temperature Feature On;
Active Blank = Instrument Stability Temperature Feature Off.
Stability Time If on, enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5-second increments.
Stability Variant If on, enter variant between 1 and 9.

204
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Misc Tab Screen

Figure I-11. Sample 870ITEC Misc Tab Screen

Field Entry
Diagnostics
Leakage √ = Enable error messages; Blank = Disable error messages.
ATC Short
ATC Open
Compensation Range
mA Range
Measurement Range
Enable All Enables all messages listed above.
Disable All Disables all messages listed above.
Local Display
Major Passcode Enter 4-digit passcode.
Minor Passcode Enter 4-digit passcode.
Display Timeout Enter timeout between 0 and 999 seconds.

205
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Application Tab Screen

Figure I-12. Sample 870ITEC App1 Tab Screen

Field Entry
Display
Custom Units √ = Custom; Blank = Not Custom
Primary Units If not Custom, select µS/cm, mS/cm, or %.
If Custom, select %, g/l, ppm, oz/gal, ppt, S/m, or NONE.
Temp Compensation Select from menu of choices.
Primary Scale Select from menu of choices.
Full Scale Enter value up to full scale limit.
Temp Linear % Enter value from 0 to 100,
Secondary Display Select Temp, Absolute, or mA.
mA Output
Output If Analog Output Mode on sensor screen, specify Absolute,
Measurement, or Temperature.
Max. Enter 20 mA range value.
Min. Enter 4 mA range value.
Failsafe
Mode Specify OFF, ON , or PULSE

206
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Value If on, enter dc mA output between 3.8 and 20.5 mA.
Application Switch Triggers Enter value of Low and High triggers.

Database Report
Table 25. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 2c Reference Temp #3 25
Tag Number FT102 Temp Size App #1 15
Tag Name 870ITEC Temp Size App #2 15
Device Name DevNam Temp Size App #3 15
Geo Location Office Chem Units #1 00
Application Select 03 Chem Units #2 00
Probe 03 Chem Units #3 00
Cell Factor 2.15 Absolute Scale #1 02
Primary Units #1 02 Absolute Scale #2 02
Primary Units #2 00 Absolute Scale #3 02
Primary Units #3 01 Custom Chem Scale #1 02
Custom Units #1 00 Custom Chem Scale #2 02
Custom Units #2 00 Custom Chem Scale #3 02
Custom Units #3 00 Meas #1 Units %
Primary Scale #1 10 Measurement Mapping 00 10 01 38
Primary Scale #2 0f Output Range Max 1000
Primary Scale #3 04 Output Range Min 0
Prim Scale CMCP #1 13 TON Count (20 mA) 26600
Prim Scale CMCP #2 04 TON Count (4 mA) 5465
Prim Scale CMCP #3 04 Meas #2 Units C
Prim Scale CMRG #1 95 Temp Units #1 00
Prim Scale CMRG #2 0 Temp Units #2 00
Prim Scale CMRG #3 20 Temp Units #3 00
Display Second #1 00 Chem Size Appl #1 15
Display Second #2 00 Chem Size Appl #2 15
Display Second #3 00 Chem Size Appl #3 15
Temp Comp TPCP #1 04 Temp Comp Temp 1 #1 0
Temp Comp TPCP #2 16 Temp Comp Val 1 #1 0
Temp Comp TPCP #3 04 Temp Comp Temp 2 #1 0
Temp Comp #1 1 Temp Comp Val 2 #1 0
Temp Comp #2 1 Temp Comp Temp 3 #1 0
Temp Comp #3 1 Temp Comp Val 3 #1 -0.22
Reference Temp #1 25 Temp Comp Temp 4 #1 0
Reference Temp #2 25 Temp Comp Val 4 #1 -0.22
Temp Comp Temp 5 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 2 #2 4
Temp Comp Val 5 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 3 #2 0

207
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Table 25. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Temp Comp Temp 6 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 3 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 6 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 4 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 7 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 4 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 7 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 5 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 8 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 5 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 8 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 6 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 9 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 6 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 9 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 7 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 10 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 7 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 10 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 8 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 11 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 8 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 11 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 9 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 12 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 9 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 12 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 10 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 13 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 10 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 13 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 11 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 14 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 11 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 14 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 12 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 15 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 12 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 15 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 13 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 16 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 13 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 16 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 14 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 17 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 14 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 17 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 15 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 18 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 15 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Val 18 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 16 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 19 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 16 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 19 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 17 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 20 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 17 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 20 #1 -0.22 Temp Comp Temp 18 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 21 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 18 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 21 #1 0.22 Temp Comp Temp 19 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 1 #2 0 Temp Comp Val 19 #2 99.99
Temp Comp Val 1 #2 2 Temp Comp Temp 20 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 2 #2 0 Temp Comp Val 20 #2 -99.99
Temp Comp Temp 21 #2 0 Temp Comp Temp 18 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 21 #2 -99.99 Temp Comp Val 18 #3 -0.22
Temp Comp Temp 1 #3 0 Temp Comp Temp 19 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 1 #3 0 Temp Comp Val 19 #3 0.22
Temp Comp Temp 2 #3 0 Temp Comp Temp 20 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 2 #3 0 Temp Comp Val 20 #3 0.22
Temp Comp Temp 3 #3 0 Temp Comp Temp 21 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 3 #3 0.22 Temp Comp Val 21 #3 0.22
Temp Comp Temp 4 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 1 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 4 #3 0.22 Chem Comp Val 1 #1 0

208
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 25. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Temp Comp Temp 5 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 2 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 5 #3 0.22 Chem Comp Val 2 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 6 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 3 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 6 #3 0.22 Chem Comp Val 3 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 7 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 4 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 7 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Val 4 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 8 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 8 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Val 5 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 9 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 9 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Val 6 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 10 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 10 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Val 7 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 11 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 11 #3 89041.48 Chem Comp Val 8 #1 0
Custom Table X/Y R/W 15969 Chem Comp Temp 9 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 12 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 9 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 12 #3 0.22 Chem Comp Temp 10 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 13 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 10 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 13 #3 0.22 Chem Comp Temp 11 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 14 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 11 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 14 #3 0.22 Chem Comp Temp 12 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 15 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 12 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 15 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Temp 13 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 16 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 13 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 16 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Temp 14 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 17 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 14 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 17 #3 -0.22 Chem Comp Temp 15 #1 0
Chem Comp Val 15 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 13 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 16 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 13 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 16 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 14 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 17 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 14 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 17 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 15 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 18 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 15 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 18 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 16 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 19 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 16 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 19 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 17 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 20 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 17 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 20 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 18 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 21 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 18 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 21 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 19 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 1 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 19 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 1 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 20 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 2 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 20 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 2 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 21 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 3 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 21 #2 0

209
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Table 25. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Chem Comp Val 3 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 1 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 4 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 1 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 4 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 2 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 5 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 2 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 5 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 3 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 6 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 3 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 6 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 4 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 7 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 4 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 7 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 8 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 5 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 8 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 9 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 6 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 9 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 10 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 7 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 10 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 11 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 8 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 11 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 9 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 12 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 9 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 12 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 10 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 10 #3 0 Output mA #3 -0.0125
Chem Comp Temp 11 #3 0 Temperature Units 00
Chem Comp Val 11 #3 0 Temperature Mode 00
Chem Comp Temp 12 #3 0 Temp Auto Mode 10
Chem Comp Val 12 #3 0 Temp Manual Mode 25
Chem Comp Temp 13 #3 0 Temp Type 04
Chem Comp Val 13 #3 0 Damp 02
Chem Comp Temp 14 #3 0 Meas Stability 01
Chem Comp Val 14 #3 0 Meas Stability Time 05
Chem Comp Temp 15 #3 0 Meas Stability Var 01
Chem Comp Val 15 #3 0 Temp Stability 00
Chem Comp Temp 16 #3 0 Temp Stability Time 00
Chem Comp Val 16 #3 0 Temp Stability Var 09
Chem Comp Temp 17 #3 0 Timeout 600
Chem Comp Val 17 #3 0 Minor Passcode 800
Chem Comp Temp 18 #3 0 Major Passcode 800
Chem Comp Val 18 #3 0 Number Applications 02
Chem Comp Temp 19 #3 0 Trigger: #1 High 99
Chem Comp Val 19 #3 0 Trigger: #2 Low 0
Chem Comp Temp 20 #3 0 Trigger: #2 High 1000
Chem Comp Val 20 #3 0 Trigger: #3 Low 0
Chem Comp Temp 21 #3 0 Hold Configuration 80
Chem Comp Val 21 #3 0 mA Hold Value 0.3749999
Analog Output #1 01 Meas 1 Hold Value 200
Analog Output #2 01 Temp Hold Value 0
Analog Output #3 01 Absolute Hold Value 999

210
Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 25. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Lower Range Value #1 90 Cal Name (App 1): GTF
Lower Range Value #2 0 Cal Name (App 2): STD
Lower Range Value #3 0 Cal Name (App 3): GTF
Upper Range Value #1 99 Cal Date: #1 4/16/98
Upper Range Value #2 25 Cal Date: #2 12/4/97
Upper Range Value #3 25 Cal Date: #3 4/16/98
Output Failsafe #1 00 Sales Order Number 95F0000000010001
Output Failsafe #2 00 MS Code 870ITEC
Output Failsafe #3 00 Software Version 53 56 4e 5f
Output mA #1 -0.0125 Low Meas Cal #1 0
Output mA #2 -0.0125 Low Meas Cal #2 10
Low Meas Cal #3 25 K Ref Resistance 1958.983
High Meas Cal #1 95 TCAL1 25
High Meas Cal #2 25 Thermistor Cal (#1) 100722
High Meas Cal #3 35 Thermistor Cal (#2) 524277.8
Kernal Major Rev # 00 Trigger: #1 Low -1e+010
Kernal Minor Rev # 04 Trigger: #3 High 1e+010
SREVMJ 01 REV_INFO be
SREVMN 14 IGN2 8/16/02
Display Major Rev # 00 Sensor Minor Rev # 14
Display Minor Rev # 00 Sensor Major Rev # 01
Parameter Tbl Offset c9 3b IGN3 4
Parameter Table CRC bf 0e IGN4 150
Parameter Table Type 00 IGN5 ff
Parameter Table Size 00 ff
Reserved 00 00 00
Calibration Req’d 06
Core Manufact. Date 1/1/94
Output Mode 01
Enable/Disable Diag c3 f0 f0 c3
Clear Diagnostics 00 00 00 00
Low Cal Point KCL 1 143.8768
Low Cal Point KCL 2 10
Low Cal Point KCL 3 3
High Cal Point KCH 1 0
High Cal Point KCH 2 2 -614450.4
High Cal Point KCH 3 3 -1335957
Low Cal Point VCL 1 -0.002598027
Low Cal Point VCL 2 -0.00291353
Low Cal Point VCL 3 -0.002883723
Temperature Offset 215
User In 0
Drive 0 Amp Offset 1521
Drive 90 Amp Offset 175
Meas 0 Amp Offset -767

211
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix I. 870ITEC Transmitters

Table 25. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Meas 90 Amp Offset -632
Freq Conv Factor 500000
Ohm Ref Res 138.5662

212
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE
Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 870ITPH Transmitters in regard to
the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure J-1. Sample 870ITPH Device Data Screen

213
 MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Error Messages
Table 26. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is re- If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
initializing on reset. does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Error Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine problem
diagnostic error. and corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of
Status Error secondary status. the screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Measurement Unstable process Check sensor connection. Select Test > Go On-Line.
Error measurement. If this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
Received a bad message. problem, contact the CSC.
Stability Error Raw measurement Check wiring. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does
has been unstable. not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Probe Error Indicates an error If Coat error, clean probe. If Lowslope error, replace
with the probe. buffer solution (if contaminated). For other problems,
replace probe.
Temp Comp Problem in temperature Check ATC connection. Verify process temperature.
Error measurement. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
problem, contact the CSC.
Amplifier Error Out of range error. Check probe. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does
not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Extended Status - Hardware
ATC Open Resistance of temperature Replace temperature compensator.
compensation is less than
expected resistance of
device configured.
ATC Short Resistance of temperature Replace temperature compensator.
compensation is greater
than expected resistance of
device configured.
Coat Error Reference junction Clean electrode.
resistance in relation to
solution ground is
less than user set limit.

214
 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 26. Transmitter Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Glass Res Error Resistance of glass Replace electrode.
electrode in relation
to solution ground is
less than user set limit.
Aging Error Aging glass electrode. Check value of slope. See 870ITPH pH/ISE/ORP
Transmitters (MI 611-211).
Leak Error Resistance between Replace sensor.
solution ground and the
RTD is greater than
infinite.
Amp Failure Out of range error. Check sensor. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does
not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Slope Error Nernst slope of Replace electrode or solution.
sensor is less
than user set limit.
Cal Slope Error A slope error has occurred Check sensor and recalibrate transmitter. If the
as the result of the problem persists, contact the CSC.
previous calibration.
Extended Status - Process
mA Under Range Measurement outside Reconfigure range or correct process error.
mA Over Range configured range.
Cal Required Calibration required. Calibrate.
Comp Under Measurement outside Reconfigure compensation or correct process error.
Range compensation curve.
Comp Over
Range
No A2D
Interrupts
Unstable Temp Unstable temperature Check ATC connection. Verify process temperature.
measurement. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
problem, contact the CSC.
Unstable Meas Unstable process Check measurement sensor connection. Select Test >
measurement. Go On-Line. If this does not clear problem, contact
the CSC.
Disp Under Range Primary measurement Check sensor connection. Select Test > Go On-Line.
Disp over Range is too low or too high. If this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem in the Recalibrate the transmitter. If problem persists,
previous calibration. contact the CSC.
RTD Cal Tolerance RTD calibration is Recalibrate the RTD. If problem persists, contact the
not within tolerance. CSC.

215
 MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Table 26. Transmitter Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem Recalibrate the transmitter. If problem persists,
in the previous contact the CSC.
calibration.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 870ITPH transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurators:
♦ 1-Point Manual Calibration
♦ 2-Point Manual Calibration
♦ Automatic Calibration
♦ Temperature Sensor
♦ mA Calibration.

1-Point Manual Calibration

This option permits you to set a calibration point (1-point offset), using a known reference
solution (buffer).
1. Select 1-Point Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure J-2. Sample 870ITPH 1-Point Manual Calibration Screen

3. Enter the solution value and the calibrator’s initials and select Continue.
4. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.

216
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

5. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
6. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

2-Point Manual Calibration

This option permits you to set span and offset, using two known reference solutions (buffers).
1. Select 2-Point Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure J-3. Sample 870ITPH 2-Point Manual Calibration Screen

3. Enter the high and low solution values and the calibrator’s initials and select
Continue.
4. Immerse the sensor in the low solution and select Continue.
5. Wait while the device is calibrating.
6. Immerse the sensor in the high solution and select Continue.
7. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
8. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

217
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Automatic Calibration
This option provides a buffer-recognition mechanism that locks in the buffer value representing
millivolts and temperature being reported from the sensor, using known reference solutions. The
algorithm checks each buffer starting with Buffer 1 and selects the first one for which this pH is
within 0.5 pH of the average pH for the buffer. If not within 0.5 pH of any buffer table, no buffer
is selected.
1. Select Automatic Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Enter the calibrator’s initials and select Continue.
4. Immerse the sensor in the low solution and select Continue.
5. Wait while the device is calibrating.
6. Immerse the sensor in the high solution and select Continue.
7. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
8. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Temperature Sensor
This option permits you to calibrate the temperature sensor to the known temperature of a
solution.
1. Select Temperature Sensor from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure J-4. Sample 870ITPH Temperature Calibration Screen

218
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

3. Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator’s initials and select Continue.
4. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required. This
procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does
not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring.
The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.

Figure J-5. Sample 870ITPH mA Calibration Screen

5. Set the Step Size from the menu (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select
Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
in the screen.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

219
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure J-6. Sample 870ITPH Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters
become the transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.

220
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Sensor Tab Screen

Figure J-7. Sample 870ITPH Sensor Tab Screen

Field Entry
Sensor
Type Select pH, ISE, or ORP.
Electrode If pH, select Glass, Antimony, or Other.
If ISE, select Positive or Negative.
Buffers If pH, select American, NIST, European, or Special (see
Figure J-8).
Resolution Scale If pH, select 0.1 pH or 0.01 pH .
Temp. Compensation If pH, select Standard, Ammonia, or Custom (see Figure J-9).
If ISE, select Standard or Custom.
Chem. Compensation If ISE, select Standard or Custom (see Figure J-10).

221
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Figure J-8. Custom Buffers Screen

Figure J-9. Custom Temperature Compensation Screen

222
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure J-10. Custom Chemical Compensation Screen

223
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Output Tab Screen

Figure J-11. Sample 870ITPH Output Tab Screen

Field Entry
mA Output
Mode Select Digital or 4-20 mA.
Failsafe Mode If 4-20 mA Mode, specify OFF, ON, or PULSE.
Failsafe Value If ON, enter dc mA output between 3.8 and 20.5 mA.
mA Output If 4-20 mA Mode, specify Absolute, Measurement, or
Temperature.
Output Max Value If 4-20 mA Mode, enter 20 mA range value.
Output Min Value If 4-20 mA Mode, enter 4 mA range value.
Local Display
Major Passcode Enter 4-digit passcode.
Minor Passcode Enter 4-digit passcode.
Display Timeout Enter timeout between 0 and 999 seconds.
Secondary Meas Select Temperature, Absolute, or mA.
Damping Select damping response time of 1, 5, 10, 20, 40, or
120 seconds.
AC Frequency Select 50 or 60 Hz.

224
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Measurement Tab Screen

Figure J-12. Sample 870ITPH Measurement Tab Screen

Field Entry
Temperature
Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Mode Select Automatic or Manual.
Failure Value If Mode is Automatic, enter temperature in case RTD fails.
Manual Temperature If Mode is Manual, enter temperature.
Temperature Sensor Select 2-wire 100 Ω, 2-wire 1000 Ω, 3-wire 100 Ω, 3-wire 1000 Ω,
or Balco 3K.
Stability Indicators
Measurement Stability √ = Instrument Stability Measurement Feature On;
Blank = Instrument Stability Measurement Feature Off
Stability Time If on, enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5-second increments.
Stability Variant If on, enter variant between 1 and 9.
Temperature Stability √ = Instrument Stability Temperature Feature On;
Blank = Instrument Stability Temperature Feature Off
Stability Time If on, enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5-second increments.
Stability Variant If on, enter variant between 1 and 9.

225
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Diagnostic Tab Screen

Figure J-13. Sample 870ITPH Diagnostic Tab Screen

Field Entry
Diagnostics
Leakage
Pre-Amp
Glass
Coat
Low Slope
ATC Short √ = Enable error messages; Blank = Disable error messages
ATC Open
Aging
4-20 mA Range
Measurement Range
Compensation Range
Enable All Enables all messages listed above.
Disable All Disables all messages listed above.
Glass Limit Select from menu of values between 0 and 1100 kΩ.
Glass Cutoff Enter value between 0 and 100 degrees.

226
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Coat Limit Select from menu of values between 0 and 100 kΩ.
Low Slope Limit Enter value between 0 and 100%.

Database Report
Table 27. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 2b pH Cal Point ASYMM -0.1040039
Tag Number FT106 History Slope 1 0
Tag Name 870ITPH History Slope 2 0
Device Name DevNam History Slope 3 0
Geo Location myloc History Slope 4 0
Model Code 870ITPH History Slope 5 0
Sales Order Number 95f0000000010001 Temperature Offset 234.3723
Software Version ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ Low mV Cal Point -421724
Calibrator’s Initial GTF High mV Cal Point 0.004747301
Calibration Date 4/16/98 Temp 100 Ohm Cal 138.6425
Sensor Type 00 Temp not 100 Ohm Cal 1959.046
Resolution/Scale 00 Glass Low Calib Pt 0
Meas #2 Display 02 Glass High Calib Pt 0
mA Output 01 Ref Low Calib Pt 2.657
Output Range Max 14 Ref High Calib Pt 25
Output Range Min 0 TON Count (20 mA) 26526
Failsafe Mode 00 TON Count (4 mA) 5310
Failsafe Value -0.0125 Meas #1 Units pH
Electrode 00 Meas #2 Units F
Temp. Compensation 02 User In 0
Temp Decimal Point 00 Number Temp Points 02
Reference Temp 25 Temp Compens Temp 1 0
Temperature Units 01 Temp Compens Val 1 226.92
Temperature Mode 01 Temp Compens Temp 2 0
Temp Failure Value 77 Temp Compens Val 2 226.92
Manual Temperature 86 Temp Compens Temp 3 0
Temp Sensor Type 03 Temp Compens Val 3 226.92
Damping 02 Temp Compens Temp 4 0
Chemical Compens. 01 Temp Compens Val 4 25.5
Chem Decimal Point 00 Temp Compens Temp 5 0
Meas Stability 00 Temp Compens Val 5 -227
Meas Stable Time 0a Temp Compens Temp 6 0
Meas Stable Var 09 Temp Compens Val 6 -227
Temp Stability 00 Temp Compens Temp 7 0
Temp Stable Time 0a Temp Compens Val 7 -227
Temp Stable Var 09 Temp Compens Temp 8 0
ISO Value 7 Temp Compens Val 8 -227
Display Time Out 600 Temp Compens Temp 9 0

227
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Table 27. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Buffers 00 Temp Compens Val 9 226.92
Major Passcode 0 Temp Compens Temp 10 0
Minor Passcode 0 Temp Compens Val 10 226.92
AC Frequency 32 Temp Compens Temp 11 0
Coat Limit 08 Temp Compens Val 11 226.92
Glass Limit 09 Temp Compens Temp 12 0
Glass CutOff Temp 50 Temp Compens Val 12 226.92
Low Slope Limit 80 Temp Compens Temp 13 0
Hold Configuration 01 Temp Compens Val 13 -227
mA Hold Value 0.4375 Temp Compens Temp 14 0
Meas 1 Hold Value -1 Temp Compens Val 14 -227
Temp Hold Value 77 Temp Compens Temp 15 0
Absolute Hold Value 77 Temp Compens Val 15 -227
Enable/Disable Diag 84 f0 ff 7f Temp Compens Temp 16 0
Clear Diagnostics 00 00 00 00 Temp Compens Val 16 -227
Core Number 00 00 Temp Compens Temp 17 0
Core Manufact. Date 1/1/94 Temp Compens Val 17 226.92
Output Mode 00 Temp Compens Temp 18 0
Glass Resistance 0 Temp Compens Val 18 226.92
Reference Resistance 0 Temp Compens Temp 19 0
Low Cal Point MCL 6.972867 Temp Compens Val 19 226.92
High Cal Point MCH 6.972867 Temp Compens Temp 20 0
Low Cal Point KCL -9.744641 Temp Compens Val 20 226.92
Low Cal Point VCL -46 Temp Compens Temp 21 0
High Cal Point KCH -0.02389015 Temp Compens Val 21 -227
ISE Low Cal Pt MVMCL 0 Number Chem Points 02
ISE Hi Cal Pt KPPM 1000 Chem Compens Abs 1 0
Chem Compens New 1 226.92 Buffer 2 Temp 1 0
Chem Compens Abs 2 0 Buffer 2 Val 1 -219.29
Chem Compens New 2 226.92 Buffer 2 Temp 2 0
Chem Compens Abs 3 0 Buffer 2 Val 2 219.3
Chem Compens New 3 -227 Buffer 2 Temp 3 0
Chem Compens Abs 4 0 Buffer 2 Val 3 219.3
Chem Compens New 4 -227 Buffer 2 Temp 4 0
Chem Compens Abs 5 0 Buffer 2 Val 4 219.3
Chem Compens New 5 -227 Buffer 2 Temp 5 0
Chem Compens Abs 6 0 Buffer 2 Val 5 219.3
Chem Compens New 6 -227 Buffer 2 Temp 6 0
Chem Compens Abs 7 0 Buffer 2 Val 6 -219.29
Chem Compens New 7 226.92 Buffer 2 Temp 7 0
Chem Compens Abs 8 0 Buffer 2 Val 7 -219.29
Chem Compens New 8 226.92 Buffer 2 Temp 8 0
Chem Compens Abs 9 0 Buffer 2 Val 8 -219.29
Chem Compens New 9 226.92 Buffer 2 Temp 9 0
Chem Compens Abs 10 0 Buffer 2 Val 9 -219.29

228
Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 27. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Chem Compens New 10 226.92 Buffer 2 Temp 10 0
Chem Compens Abs 11 0 Buffer 2 Val 10 219.3
Chem Compens New 11 -227 Buffer 2 Temp 11 0
Chem Compens Abs 12 0 Buffer 2 Val 11 219.3
Chem Compens New 12 -227 Buffer 3 Size 01
Chem Compens Abs 13 0 Buffer 3 Temp 1 0
Chem Compens New 13 -227 Buffer 3 Val 1 219.3
Chem Compens Abs 14 0 Buffer 3 Temp 2 0
Chem Compens New 14 -227 Buffer 3 Val 2 219.3
Chem Compens Abs 15 0 Buffer 3 Temp 3 0
Chem Compens New 15 226.92 Buffer 3 Val 3 -219.29
Chem Compens Abs 16 0 Buffer 3 Temp 4 0
Chem Compens New 16 226.92 Buffer 3 Val 4 -219.29
Chem Compens Abs 17 0 Buffer 3 Temp 5 0
Chem Compens New 17 226.92 Buffer 3 Val 5 -219.29
Chem Compens Abs 18 0 Buffer 3 Temp 6 0
Chem Compens New 18 226.92 Buffer 3 Val 6 -219.29
Chem Compens Abs 19 0 Buffer 3 Temp 7 0
Chem Compens New 19 -227 Buffer 3 Val 7 219.3
Chem Compens Abs 20 0 Buffer 3 Temp 8 0
Chem Compens New 20 -227 Buffer 3 Val 8 219.3
Chem Compens Abs 21 0 Buffer 3 Temp 9 0
Chem Compens New 21 -227 Buffer 3 Val 9 219.3
Buffer 1 Size 02 Buffer 3 Temp 10 0
Buffer 1 Temp 1 0 Buffer 3 Val 10 219.3
Buffer 1 Val 1 -219.29 Buffer 3 Temp 11 0
Buffer 1 Temp 2 0 Buffer 3 Val 11 -219.29
Buffer 1 Val 2 -219.29 Measurement Mapping 01 01 02 03
Buffer 1 Temp 3 0 Database Change Flag 72
Buffer 1 Val 3 -219.29 Kernal Major Rev # 00
Buffer 1 Temp 4 0 Kernal Minor Rev # 04
Buffer 1 Val 4 -219.29 SREVMAJ 01
Buffer 1 Temp 5 0 SREVMIN 01
Buffer 1 Val 5 219.3 Display Major Rev # 00
Buffer 1 Temp 6 0 Display Minor Rev # 00
Buffer 1 Val 6 219.3 Parameter Tbl Offset c9
Buffer 1 Temp 7 0 Parameter Table CRC 1f dd
Buffer 1 Val 7 219.3 Parameter Table Type 00
Buffer 1 Temp 8 0 Parameter Table Size 00 dd
Buffer 1 Val 8 219.3 Reserved 00 00 00
Buffer 1 Temp 9 0 Calibration Req’d 00
Buffer 1 Val 9 -219.29 Drive 0 Amp Offset 0
Buffer 1 Temp 10 0 Custom Table X/Y Rd/ 60093
Buffer 1 Val 10 -219.29 Meas 0 Amp Offset 0
Buffer 1 Temp 11 0 Meas 90 Amp Offset 0

229
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix J. 870ITPH pH/ORP/ISE Transmitters

Table 27. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Buffer 1 Val 11 -219.29 Eng Units Name pH F
Buffer 2 Size 02 Freq Conv Factor 500000
mA Correction #1 2
mA Correction #2 2
mA Correction #3 2
CMCL 0
CMCH 0

REV_INFO be
IGN2 8/16/02
Sensor Minor Rev # 14
Sensor Major Rev # 01
IGN3 4
IGN4 150
IGN5 dd

230
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners
(SRD991, SRD960, and so forth)
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the Intelligent Positioners (SRD991,
SRD960, and so forth) in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. See the list of all
supported Intelligent Positioners (all different models and protocols) in Table 2. The
configurations of the different Intelligent Positioner models are very similar to each other. The
following description shows the configuration of the Intelligent Positioners using the SRD991 as
an example. If there are differences between the models and protocols it will be outlined in the
description.
This appendix contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Status Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report
For additional information, refer to on-line Help and MI EVE0105.

Device Data Screen

Figure K-1. Sample SRD991 Device Data Screen

231
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Additional Profibus Data Screen

For Profibus devices, an additional Data screen may be opened to display additional Profibus
specific parameters. For viewing the Profibus data, select View > Profibus Data. This function
opens a modeless dialog box. The displayed information is updated approximately once every two
seconds.

Figure K-2. Standard Profibus Data Screen

Fields Description
Readback The actual position of the actuator/valve within
the travel span in units of PV-SCALE.
Position D The current position of the actuator/valve
(discrete). Possible values are: NOT
INITIALIZED (before an autostart has been
performed), CLOSED, OPENED and
INTERMEDIATE.
FB-Mode Actual Mode of the Function Block.
SP Setpoint SP in units of PV-SCALE. This setpoint
is used as desired value, when the function block
is in Mode AUTO and the status of SP is OK
(for example, Good (Non Cascade) = 0x80).

232
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Fields Description
RCAS_IN Setpoint RCAS_IN in units of PV-SCALE. This
setpoint is normally transmitted by a DCS-
system. This setpoint is used as desired value,
when the function block is in Mode RCAS and
the status of RCAS_IN is OK [for example,
Good (Cascade) = 0xC0].
RCAS_OUT Setpoint RCAS_OUT in units of PV-SCALE
with status, which is used as input for the
function block algorithm. Depending on the
mode of the function block contains the setpoint
SP or RCAS_IN. RCAS_OUT is offered for the
DCS-System or other function blocks.
OUT Output Setpoint of the function block in units of
OUT-SCALE with status. It is valid, when the
function block is in mode AUTO or RCAS. In
mode MAN, this value can be specified by the
operator/engineer.

Status Error Messages

Table 28. Field Device Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Temp. High Temperature above Operation outside temperature limit may damage
allowed limit. positioner components and violate electrical safety
Temp. Low Temperature below certification requirements. Stop operating positioner.
allowed limit.
Invalid Invalid configuration. Correct configuration, perform Restore Factory
Configuration Settings, rerun Autostart procedure.
Travel Sum Travel sum has Check valve performance and conduct maintenance if
Limit exceeded limit necessary.
configured.
Cycle Count Cycle count has Check valve performance and conduct maintenance if
Limit exceeded limit necessary.
configured.
Input Loop Input signal requires Perform Analog Setpoint Calibration procedure.
Trim calibration.
Feedback Feedback unit requires Perform Angle Calibration procedure.
Trim calibration.

233
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Table 28. Field Device Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

No Autostart No Autostart was done Ensure proper mounting of positioner and adequate
Done or Autostart was run supply pressure. Refer to on-line Help for other
and did not complete potential causes. Rerun Autostart Calibration
successfully. procedure.
Position High Position above High Monitor situation or correct cause.
Alarm Alarm Set Point.
Position Low Position below Low Monitor situation or correct cause.
Alarm Alarm Set Point.
Position High Position above High Monitor situation or correct cause.
High Alarm High Alarm Set Point.
Position Low Position below Low Monitor situation or correct cause.
Low Alarm Low Alarm Set Point.
Control Diff Difference between set Check to ensure that there is adequate supply pressure.
OOL point requested and Verify tuning parameters. Refer to troubleshooting
current position section of SRD991 Intelligent Positioner
exceeds allowed limit (MI EVE 0105A).
for a user specified
time.
Binary Input The Binary Input signal Monitor situation or correct cause.
1 or 2 is active.
Air Supply The air supply pressure Check to ensure that there is adequate supply
Pressure Alarm fell below the pressure.
configured lower limit.
Output The positioner cannot Check the pneumatics.
Pressure Alarm regulate the output
pressure.
RAM Error writing Replace failed item or positioner.
positioner memory.
EEPROM Error writing Replace failed item or positioner.
positioner EEPROM.
ROM Error writing Replace failed item or positioner.
positioner ROM.
AD Converter Converter function not Replace failed item or positioner.
controllable.
Actuator OOR Position is not within Check mechanics of actuator and valve. Perform
permissible range Endpoints calibration.
(-5%...+105%).
Current Loop Connection of I/P Replace failed item or positioner.
I/P Motor converter to electronic
board failed.

234
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 28. Field Device Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Potentiometer Connection of Replace failed item or positioner.
potentiometer to
electronic
board failed.
Option Board Option board was not Check configuration or replace failed option board.
configured or failed.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an SRD991 Intelligent Positioner using
IFDC/PC20 software:
♦ Autostart
♦ Endpoints
♦ Analog Setpoint (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Angle (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Temperature (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Position Feedback (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Air Supply Pressure (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Output Pressure (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Restore Valve Specific Parameter (only allowed at workshop security level)
♦ Restore Factory Settings (only allowed at workshop security level).

Autostart Calibration
This function determines valve travel limits, zero, span, and tuning parameters. It does this in
four stages:
♦ Determining the limits of actuator travel.
♦ A series of ramps to determine the control system parameters
♦ A series of steps to determine the control parameters
♦ Determining the positioning speeds.

! CAUTION
In performing this function, the valve is stroked several times and ramps are applied to
the input signal. If the process cannot be disturbed, then Autostart should not be
executed.

235
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

The procedure to perform an Autostart calibration is:

1. Select Autostart from the Calibration menu.
2. Acknowledge the warning.
3. Enter the calibration data or suitable message upon successful completion.
If Autostart is not successful, it may terminate before reaching the last step. This means that the
positioner is not properly calibrated. To check whether Autostart has been successfully completed
or not, select Valve Status from Test in the device top level menu. Potential reasons for Autostart
not completing include:
♦ Positioner mounting problem. Feedback lever or coupling is in the wrong orientation.
Refer to Section 1 of SRD991 Intelligent Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) on “getting
started”.
♦ Inadequate supply pressure.
♦ Large actuator. Use Endpoint Calibration and tune manually. Employ boosters to
increase output capacity.
♦ Hardware problem.

Endpoints Calibration
Endpoints calibration automatically detects the valve end points. It does this by using only the
first of the four Autostart steps. This process determines the valve mechanical travel stops, zero
and span, but not the tuning set. Accordingly, it requires much less time than a full Autostart
calibration. If the tuning parameters are available for the control valve from previous testing or
existing data, then performing Endpoints calibration and manually entering the tuning set
shortens the positioner setup time significantly.
The procedure to perform an Endpoints calibration is:
1. Select Endpoints from the Calibration menu.
2. Acknowledge the warning.
3. Enter the calibration data or suitable message upon successful completion.

Analog Setpoint Calibration

Analog setpoint calibration enables you to calibrate the upper and lower limits of the current
input (4 mA and 20 mA) if the positioner is being used in analog mode. Using the positioner in
the analog mode requires jumper selection on the printed wiring board. Refer to SRD991
Intelligent Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) for the correct jumper location.

! CAUTION
When in analog mode, the positioner cannot be connected to a voltage source. To do
so causes permanent damage to the instrument.

NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

236
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

The procedure to perform an Analog Setpoint calibration is:

1. Take the positioner out of the process loop and connect it to a current source.
2. Select Analog Setpoint from the Calibration menu.
3. Set input current to 4 mA.
4. Acknowledge by entering this value (4 mA) in the edit box on the display.
5. Set the input current to 20 mA.
6. Acknowledge by entering this value (20 mA) in the edit box on the display.
7. The screen responds with the message that the Analog Setpoint Calibration has
finished.

Angle Calibration
Angle calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board or the potentiometer is replaced.
This operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools and removal of the
positioner from the valve. Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) for more
information.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

The procedure to perform an Angle calibration is:

1. Select Angle from the Calibration menu.
2. The feedback lever is rotated to the lower angle value (typically 45° down from
horizontal).
3. Acknowledge by entering the lower angle value into the edit box on the display.
4. The feedback lever is rotated to the upper angle value (typically 45° up from
horizontal).
5. Acknowledge by entering the upper angle value into the edit box on the display.
6. The screen responds with a message that the Angle Calibration has finished.

Temperature Calibration
Temperature calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board is replaced. The function
calibrates the temperature of the internal electronics module. It is intended to be performed on
the bench. A temperature probe and other special tools are required. Refer to SRD991 Intelligent
Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) for more information.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

237
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

The procedure to perform a Temperature Calibration is:

1. Select Temperature from the Calibration menu.
2. After selecting Continue to proceed, measure the electronics temperature with a
probe.
3. Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue.
The temperature calibration is finished.

Position Feedback Calibration

This function performs calibration of the output of the position feedback option board. This
operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools and special electrical
connections. Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) for more information.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

Air Supply Pressure Calibration

Air Supply Pressure Calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board is replaced. This
operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools. Refer to SRD991
Intelligent Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) for more information.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

The procedure to perform an Air Supply Pressure Calibration is:

1. Select Air Supply from the Calibration menu.
2. Regulate the air supply to the LOW supply pressure value.
3. Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue.
4. Regulate the air supply to the HIGH supply pressure value.
5. Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue.
The Air Supply Pressure Calibration is finished.

Output Pressure Calibration

Output Pressure Calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board is replaced. This
operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools. Refer to SRD991
Intelligent Positioner (MI EVE 0105 A) for more information.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

The procedure to perform an output pressure calibration is:

1. Select Output Pressure from the Calibration menu.
2. Using the pushbuttons, set the setpoint to 0%.

238
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

3. Check the pressure gauge attached to the output port of the positioner. Enter this
value in the edit box on the display and select Continue.
4. Using the pushbuttons, set the setpoint to 100%.
5. Check the pressure gauge attached to the output port of the positioner. Enter this
value in the edit box on the display and select Continue.
The Output Pressure Calibration is finished.

Restore Valve-Specific Parameter

This function allows writing of valve specific parameters into the positioner. By reading the data
file of one positioner mounted to a valve and writing these values into a new positioner, the new
positioner is adopted to that valve without performing an Autostart Calibration. However, due to
mechanical tolerances in mounting, the adoption is not optimal. Therefore, performing a new
Autostart Calibration or Endpoint Calibration is required as soon as possible.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

Restore Factory Settings

This function resets all calibration and configuration data back to the calibration and
configuration data existing at time of delivery from the factory. The valve’s current database is
overwritten. This function is useful, for example, when a positioner is taken from one valve and
mounted to another valve.
NOTE
This function is only allowed at workshop security level.

Test
You can perform the following procedures on the SRD991 Intelligent Positioner using the Test
menu: Go On-Line, Go Off-line, Go Local, Set Setpoint, Reset Status, Reset Counters, Reboot
Device, and Write Protect.

Go On-Line
This function sets the device into the on-line mode where normal control is performed. The
positioner allows a digital or analog setpoint depending on the configuration of the setpoint
source.

Go Off-Line
This function sets the device into the off-line mode where normal control is not performed. The
pneumatic output is frozen to the last value of the pneumatic output before performing this
function.

239
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Go Local
This function sets the device into the local mode. Local mode is similar to on-line mode where
normal control is performed. However, the positioner does not follow the digital or analog
setpoint from the I/A Series system. It follows the digital setpoint from the IFDC/PC20
configurator.

Set Setpoint
This function allows IFDC/PC20 to specify a setpoint. Activating this function automatically
switches the operation mode to the local mode. This gives you the capability for testing step
responses and so forth. Leaving this function automatically switches the operation mode to the
on-line mode.

Reset Status
This function resets all current and historical status fields including the Diagnostic Status fields.
NOTE
If an underlying problem has not been corrected, the failure bits will be reasserted
almost immediately.

Reset Counters
This function resets the Cycle Count and Travel Sum parameters.

! CAUTION
This causes the device to be taken off-line for a short period which can cause a process
upset.

Reboot Device
This function causes the positioner to be rebooted.

! CAUTION
The device behaves as if the power supply were switched off and on. This can cause a
process upset.

Write Protect
This function enables or disables write protection for valve parameters. If Write Protect is enabled,
the positioner is write protected and inadvertent changing of positioner configuration data is
prevented.

240
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure K-3. Sample SRD991 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
positioner configuration filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

241
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Parameters Tab Screen

Figure K-4. Sample SRD991 Parameters Tab Screen

Field Entry
Messages 1, 2, and 3 Enter up to three messages, each up to 14 characters long.
Model Codes
Instrument Displays the factory entered positioner model code.
Information
Calibration Enter calibration info message (14 characters maximum).
Maintenance Enter maintenance message (14 characters maximum).
Fab. Number Displays a factory entered identification number.
HW Rev. Displays the factory entered hardware revision level.
Serial Number
Actuator Enter actuator serial number.
Valve Enter valve serial number.

242
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Configuration Tab Screen

Figure K-5. Sample SRD991 Configuration Tab Screen

Field Entry
Type Select Globe, Rotary Plug, Butterfly, Ball, or Diaphragm.
Power Up Specify whether you want the valve to start in Failsafe mode or fully On-line.
Actuator Action Select Single or Double.
Spring Type Specify whether the valve Closes or Opens with a spring or None if no
spring exists.
Valve Stem Specify Linear/Left Mounted, Linear/Right Mounted,
Movement Rotary/Counterclockwise, or Rotary/Clockwise.
Control Action Specify Direct or Reverse Acting.
Setpoint Source Select Analog, Analog High (4800 Baud), or Digital.
High If Analog, enter value at high end of mA range (20 mA max).
Low If Analog, enter value at low end of mA range (4 mA min).
Fail-Safe
Config. Failsafe occurs when no setpoint command is seen in the timeout specified
below. Select the fail-safe condition:
De-Energize (positioner exhausts all air in the actuator)
Hold (last valve position)
Fallback (send to position specified in next field).

243
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Field Entry
Position If Fallback, enter position in percent.
Timeout Enter Timeout in seconds (0 means none).

Characterization Tab Screen

Figure K-6. Sample SRD991 Characterization Tab Screen

Characterization : Select Linear, Equal Percentage (1:50), Quick Open (50:1), or Custom.
Custom Curve: Allows you to enter a custom curve consisting of up to 22 points (X/Y pairs).
To add a new pair of values, select Custom, enter the X- and Y-Values and press Add. The input
value pair is sorted in increasing order of the X-Values.
To modify a value pair, select the X-Value in the list box, modify the values displayed in the edit
boxes, and press Modify.
To delete a value pair, select the X-Value in the list box and press Delete.
A custom curve which is stored in the device can be activated by selecting Custom or deactivated
by switching to Linear, Equal Percentage (1:50) or Quick Open (50:1).

244
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Travel Tab Screen

Figure K-7. Sample SRD991 Travel Tab Screen

Field Entry
Response Time [Limit]
Measured T63 Time Displays the time it took for the valve to travel 63% of its full stroke in
0-100% the increasing direction during Autostart.
Measured T63 Time Displays the time it took for the valve to travel 63% of its full stroke in
100-0% the decreasing direction during Autostart.
Travel Stops
Lower Enter lower travel stop in percent of total stroke.
Upper Enter upper travel stop in percent of total stroke.
Cutoff
Cutoff Deadband Enter the amount of hysteresis in percent of travel required above the
cutoff value before the valve can reopen again. For example, with 2%
cutoff, 0.5% cutoff hysteresis allows the valve to reopen at 2.5%.
Cutoff % Enter the value in percent of travel below which the valve is fully closed.
For example, when set at 2%, any signal below 2% is treated as 0%.
Travel Position Units Select mm, Inches, or Degrees
Stroke Enter the stroke in the units specified.

245
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Alarms Tab Screen

Figure K-8. Sample SRD991 Alarms Tab Screen

Field Entry
Position Allows setting position limits at which alarms are triggered.
High High Alarm Enter high high (full) alarm position in percent of stroke.
High Alarm Enter high (warning) alarm position in percent of stroke.
Low Alarm Enter low (warning) alarm position in percent of stroke.
Low Low Alarm Enter low low (full) alarm position in percent of stroke.
Alarm Deadband Enter alarm deadband in percent of travel.
Control Difference Allows setting an alarm when the actual position varies from the setpoint by
a specified amount for a specified time.
Limit Enter the amount in percent of travel.
Time Enter the time in seconds.
Temperature Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Temperature Displays temperature limits of the positioner in units specified on the Units
Lower Limit Tab screen.
Upper Limit
Travel Sum Allows setting alarms on total stroke for maintenance purposes.
Deadband Enter deadband in percent of stroke. Small movements below this value are
not included in the travel sum.

246
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Full Strokes Limit Enter the alarm condition in number of full strokes. Partial movement
larger than the deadband value are included in this total (for example, four
1/4 strokes are counted as one full stroke).
Cycle Count Limit Enter the alarm condition in number of cycles. Each cycle is a change in
value direction, any movement up or down, which exceeds sensitivity of the
device.

Tuning Tab Screen

Figure K-9. Sample SRD991 Tuning Tab Screen

Field Entry
Increasing Position
Proportional Enter proportional gain value.
Integral Enter reset time in seconds.
Derivative Enter derivative time in seconds.
Decreasing Position
Proportional Enter proportional gain value.
Integral Enter reset time in seconds.
Derivative Enter derivative time in seconds.

247
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Field Entry
Travel Time Limits
Increasing Entering values higher than the defaults slows down response.
Decreasing Travel time limits are used to modify control valve dynamics.
Control Gap Control gap defines the sensitivity of the positioner so that no
corrective action is taken if the control difference is less than
the defined limit.

Pressure Tab Screen

Figure K-10. Sample SRD991 Pressure Tab Screen

Field Entry
Output 1 Pressure Units Select psig, kPa, or bar.
Air Supply Pressure Units Select psig, kPa, or bar.
(Positioning) Output Pressure Scaling
Low Enter low limit for output pressure sensor. Default is 0 psig.
High Enter high limit for output pressure sensor. Default is 87 psig
(6 bars).
Air Supply (Pressure) Scaling
Low Enter low limit for supply pressure sensor. Default is 0 psig.

248
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
High Enter high limit for supply pressure sensor. Default is 87 psig
(6 bars).
Lower Limit Enter the value for supply pressure below which an alarm is
triggered.

Options Tab Screen

Figure K-11. Sample SRD991 Options Tab Screen

Field Entry
Option Board Select from the following:
No External Option
External Position Transmission
External Binary Input
External Binary Output
External Analog Sensor
Internal Pressure Sensors Select or deselect internal pressure sensors.

249
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Bin In Tab Screen

Figure K-12. Sample SRD991 Bin In Tab Screen

The Binary Input option features two independent binary inputs with internal supply for
connection of sensors. A connected switch is loaded with 3.5 V and 0.15 mA.
Using the Bin In Tab screen, you can configure an active signal to activate an alarm or force the
actuator to go to 0% or 100%.

250
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Bin Out Tab Screen

Figure K-13. Sample SRD991 Bin Out Tab Screen

The Binary Output option enables you to define which alarm activates the binary input.

251
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Profibus Function Block Tab Screen

Figure K-14. Sample Profibus Function Tab Screen

Fields Entries
Target Mode Contains the desired mode of the function
block.
PV-SCALE: Conversion of a process value in the defined
engineering units to a normalized value in
percent as the input value of the function block.
It contains the high and low scale values,
engineering units code, and number of digits to
the right of the decimal point. As default, PV-
PSCALE is configured to percent, meaning that
the Variables SP, Readback, RCAS_INf and
RCAS_OUT, which are depending on PV-
SCALE, are displayed in the range 0-100%.

252
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Fields Entries
OUT-SCALE: Conversion of the normalized Output Signal (in
percent) of the function block to the OUT
parameter in the defined engineering units. It
contains the high and low scale values,
engineering units code, and number of digits to
the right of the decimal point. As default, OUT-
SCALE is configured to percent, meaning that
the Variable OUT is displayed in the range
0-100%.
Simulation Allows definition of a value and a status. When
Simulation is enabled, this value and status is
given in Readback instead of the real position of
the actuator/valve. This set of parameters is
intended only for commissioning and
maintenance reasons.

Database Report
Table 29. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Device Type 0x24 X16 Value 0.
Geographic Location INSTR LOCATION X17 Value 0.
Manufacturing Date 00/20/2104 Y17 Value 2.802596929e-045
Firmware Revision 0x1 X18 Value 0.
Device Name DevNam Y18 Value 0.
Sensor Number 0xff X19 Value 0.
Tag Number FT103A Y19 Value 9.248569865e-044
Calibration Date 08/20/2087 X20 Value 0.
Instrument S/N INSTR SER NU Y20 Value 0.
Actuator S/N ACT SERIAL N X21 Value 0.
Valve S/N VALVE SER NU Y21 Value 0.
Message #1 MESSAGE1 Flow Characteristic 0x0
Message #2 MESSAGE2 Travel Pos. Units 0xf2
Message #3 MESSAGE3 Temperature Units 0x21
Maintenance Info MESSAGE4 Air Supply Pressure 0x7
Calibration Info MESSAGE5 Outlet Pressure Unit 0x7
Device Options 0x0 Lower Travel Stop 0.
Fabrication Number 0 Upper Travel Stop 0.
Hardware Revision 0x2 Cutoff 0.
Mounting Compensation 0x3 Cutoff Hyst. 0.
Power Up Action 0x1 Stroke -73556496.
Spring Type 0x1 Response Time (Inc) 0.
Actuator Action 0x1 Response Time (Dec) 0.

253
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

Table 29. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Valve Type 0x1 High Alarm 0.
Control Action 0x1 High High Alarm 0.
Failsafe Config 0x0 Low Alarm 0.
Failsafe Timeout 2.313824024e-041 Low Low Alarm 0.
Fallback Position 9.422788258e-038 Cycle Count Limit 30ab6e01
Setpoint Source 0x3 Travel Deadband 0.
Analog Setpoint Lo 9.219562986e-041 Travel Sum Limit 30ab6e01
Analog Setpoint Hi 1.084202302e-019 Control Diff. Limit 0.
# Characterizer Pts 0x2 Control Diff. Time 0.
X0 Value 0. Alarm Deadband 0.
Y0 Value 0. Temp. Lower Limit 0.
X1 Value 3.201686731e-041 Temp Upper Limit 0.
Y1 Value 3.201686731e-041 P Term (Dec.) 0.
X2 Value 0. I Term (Dec) 0.
Y2 Value 1.040505355e-035 D Term (Dec) 0.
X3 Value 0. P Term (Inc) 0.
Y3 Value 1.040505355e-035 I Term (Inc) 2.727090083e+023
X4 Value 0. D Term (Inc) 0.
Y4 Value 0. Rate Limit (Inc) 0.1000000015
X5 Value 0. Rate Limit (Dec) 0.1000000015
Y5 Value 0. Control Gap 0.
X6 Value 0. Setpoint 28.
Y6 Value 0. Measurement Scan 1212
X7 Value 0. Valve Position 1111
Y7 Value 0. Stem Setpoint 1313
X8 Value 0. Air Supply Pressure 1414
Y8 Value 0. Output Pressure 1515
X9 Value 0. Control Difference 0.
Y9 Value 0. Travel Position 0.
X10 Value 0. Travel Sum 0.
Y10 Value 0. Internal Temperature 5.831554006e-039
X11 Value 0. Cycle Count 0.
Y11 Value 1.016595295e-034 Analog Setpoint 2.980232239e-008
X12 Value 0. Lower Input Current 5.758085329e-039
Y12 Value 0. Upper Input Current 5.831554006e-039
X13 Value 0. Output Cal (Gain) 0.
Y13 Value 0. Output Cal (Zero) 0.
X14 Value 0. Calibrate Lower Angl 1.069022572e-040
Y14 Value 0. Calibrate Upper Angl 0.
X15 Value 0. Temperature Cal 2.053743029e-041
Y15 Value 0. Calibrate Air Supply -1.591403656e-023
Calibrate Air Supply -107454968.
Calibrate Output Min -7.321920847e-014
Calibrate Output Max 9.108440018e-044
Primary Status 0x0

254
Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and so forth) MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 29. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Secondary Status 0x0
Diagnostic Error 0x0
DB Change Count 0x3
Device Sub-Type 0x1
Instrument Mode 0x1
Additional Status 0x1
Air Supply Pressure 2.350988982e-038
Air Supply Pressure 0.
Output Pressure Min 8.968310172e-044
Output Pressure Max 9.248569865e-044
Auto Start Status 0x1
Reset Status 0x0
Restore Factory 0x0
Write Protect 0x0

255
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix K. Intelligent Positioners (SRD991, SRD960, and

256
Appendix L. 140/130 Series
Pressure and Level Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 140/130 Series Pressure and Level
Transmitters regarding the Intelligent Field Device Configurator. There are three types of
140 Series transmitters:
♦ 140 Series with HART protocol
♦ 140 Series with FoxCom protocol
♦ 140 Series with FoxCom protocol and with I/A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitter
compatibility.
The difference between the first two types is the protocol itself and some protocol-specific
differences. The third type is a FoxCom device that is compatible with the I/A Series Intelligent
Pressure Transmitters. This means that for the calibration, configuration, status windows, and so
forth, the same functions are used as for the I/A Series Pressure Transmitters described in
Appendix A “820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters”.
The 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters are only available with HART protocol. From the
configuration point of view, the behavior of the 130 Series and the 140 Series HART devices are
identical. Please refer to “140 Series with FoxCom or HART Protocol” on page 262 for a detailed
description of the configuration user interface.

140 Series with FoxCom Protocol and with I/A Series

Intelligent Pressure Transmitter Compatibility
The transmitters delivered from the factory are in the IDP10-B compatibility mode. The
140 Series FoxCom transmitter identifies itself as a IDP10-B transmitter type. In this IDP10-B
compatibility mode, it is possible to configure and calibrate the transmitter with the PC10, the
HHT, and IMTW that is integrated in I/A Series software V4.2 and below. See the appropriate
documentation for these products for more information and the technical note TI EMP0600B
for detailed information about calibration and reranging.
If this transmitter is in the IDP10-B compatibility mode and is connected to the IFDC/PC20, it
displays the message box shown in Figure L-1 during the startup phase.

257
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Figure L-1. Identification of a 140 Series Transmitter

Running in IPD10-B Compatibility Mode

The PC20 software recognizes that the connected device is a 140 Series transmitter running in the
IDP10-B compatibility mode. In this mode it is not possible to change the configuration or to do
any calibration of the transmitter. The measurement information from the device, however, is
continuously read and displayed in the Device Data window, as shown in Figure L-2.

Figure L-2. Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter
in IDP10-B Compatibility Mode.

258
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

How to Change the 140 Series Compatibility Type

If the 140 Series Transmitter is in the IDP10-B compatibility mode, it is not possible to change
the configuration, to do any calibration, documentation, and so forth with the PC20 software.
With the key combination Alt + Ctrl + T it is possible to change the compatibility mode of the
140 Series Transmitter. Pressing this key combination brings up the message box shown in
Figure L-3 and then in Figure L-4. Before you call this dialog box, you need to know the model
code of the transmitter. This information can be found on the transmitter nameplate labeled as
“MODEL.” In the successive selection dialog box, shown in Figure L-5, the model can be
selected. (Example: For a MODEL 141GP-B, select I141GP-B.) This procedure changes only the
transmitter type. Any configuration or calibration done in another mode is not changed.

Figure L-3. Change Device Type Message Screen

259
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Figure L-4. Model Identification Message Screen

Figure L-5. Model Selection Screen

Now the transmitter is in the 140 Series mode and from now on is identified as the transmitter
type corresponding to the Model Code printed on the device. Figure L-6 shows the Device Data
screen after changing the mode. In this mode, it is possible to do such tasks as configure, calibrate,
and document the transmitter with the PC20. The other configurators (PC10, HHT, and
IMTW) are not able to identify this type and can no longer be used for these tasks.

260
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure L-6. Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter in the 140 Series Mode

Using the PC20 to calibrate and configure the 140 Series transmitters is much easier, because the
software recognizes the model-specific differences. The model-specific parameters can be written
to the transmitter by selecting the menu item Calibration > Restore Default.
NOTE
This function should not be used when the transmitter is preconfigured and
calibrated by the factory or someone else for specific usage. It resets the device to the
default calibration and range settings.

If the PC20 is used to do the initial configuration and calibration steps, the model-specific
parameters must be written to the transmitter by calling the menu item Calibration > Restore
Default.
When the 140 Series transmitter is specifically identified (for example, I141GP-B), the
transmitter can be calibrated and configured as described for the I/A Series Pressure Transmitters
in Appendix A “820, 860, and I/A Series Pressure Transmitters”. All functions and displays are the
same.

261
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

If PC20 is only used to do the calibration and configuration steps for the device setup, and
afterwards the other configurators (PC10, HHT, or IMTW) are used in the operator’s
environment, it is possible to change the transmitter type back to the IDP10-B mode with the
same procedure as described above. Any calibration and configuration done by the PC20 is not
changed.

140 Series with FoxCom or HART Protocol

There is very little difference between these two transmitters except for the protocol itself and
some protocol-specific functions. The user interface for the configuration, calibration, and so
forth are the same and, therefore, described together in this section.
The FoxCom device has the same functionality as the HART device. However, the 140 Series
FoxCom transmitter with I/A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitters compatibility described in
the previous section has the functionality compatible to the I/A Series Pressure Transmitters.

Device Data Screen

The Device Data display shows the static information Tag Number, Tag Name, and Device Type
and data which is updated continuously, such as Measurement #1 (Primary Variable PV),
Electronic and Sensor Temperature, and the mA Output, if in analog mode, as shown
in Figure L-7.

262
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure L-7. Sample Device Data Screen

Device Status Screen

The Device Status screen shows the actual and historical status of the transmitter. It is accessed via
the Test menu from the device top level menu or the Status icon on the device toolbar. The
Historical status is a list of status information which was set at least once in the past. The
Historical status information can be acknowledged/reset by selecting the menu item Reset
Changed Flag .
Figure L-8 shows a sample status screen for a HART device. The layout of the status screen for a
FoxCom device is different.

263
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Figure L-8. Sample Device Status Screen

Table 30. HART Transmitter Status

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Device Busy Transmitter is busy. Try the command later again.
Device Malfunction Severe problem. Check the other status bits.
Configuration Changed The configuration of the This flag can be reset with the menu
transmitter has been changed. item Reset Changed Flag.
Cold Start Device rebooted. Check power supply.
Output Current Fixed The output current is fixed. The The Device Specific Status may show
reason might be that it is in thethe reason for the fail-safe state. When
fail-safe state. the reason for the fail-safe is gone with
the menu item Return from Failsafe,
it is possible to leave this state.
Analog Output Analog Output out The Primary Value (PV) exceeds the
Saturated of 4 to 20 mA range. configured range. Check range limits.
Variable (not Primary) Electronic or sensor temperature Check device specific status for more
out of Limits out of limits. information.
Primary Variable out of Sensor signal out of limits. Check device specific status and
Limits applied process value.

264
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 31. Device Specific Transmitter Status

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Internal Calibration There was an error during the Perform calibration again.
Failed calibration procedure.
Sensor signal exceeded There were sensor signal peaks Check sensor.
+/-150% of Nominal Range.
Write EEPROM The EEPROM might be damaged. Replace electronics.
impossible
PV out of sensor limits PV was not within +/-110% of Check measuring.
Nominal Range.
Sensor temperature out Sensor temperature was out of Check sensor temperature.
of limits limits.
Electronic temperature The electronic temperature was Check electronics.
out of limits outside the range of -40°C and
+80°C.
Measuring Range Either the range configuration is Correct range configuration.
configuration invalid out of sensor limits or the given
range is smaller than the minimum
span.

Diagnostic Codes
In the Diagnostic Codes screen the various diagnostic codes are displayed in binary, hex, and
decimal form with no text translation.

Figure L-9. Sample Diagnostic Codes Screen

265
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Raw Input Value

The Raw Input Value screen shows the input signal coming from the pressure sensor in percent. It
is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu.

Figure L-10. Sample Raw Input Value Screen

Return from Fail-Safe State

This function clears a latched fail-safe state and returns the device to normal measurements and
corresponding analog output if the reason for the fail-safe state is corrected. It is accessed via the
Test menu from the device top level menu. It is only present if Reset Failsafe was configured as
Manual.

Reset Change Flag

This function clears the Configuration Changed flag and the historical status information of the
device. It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu.

Master Reset
The execution of this function causes the transmitter to do a master reset. This takes about four
seconds. During this time the device is not able to respond to any command until the execution is
complete and the transmitter latches the output on the last value. The Master Reset function is
accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu.

Write Protect
This function enables or disables write protection for the transmitter. If Write Protect is enabled,
the transmitter is write protected and the inadvertent changing of transmitter configuration data
is prevented.

Configuration
The Configuration function is accessed via the Edit menu from the device top level menu or from
the Configuration icon on the device toolbar.
NOTE
Whenever you change any configuration parameter and write the change to the
transmitter, the Configuration Changed flag is set.

266
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Identifier Tab Screen

The factory installed information on the transmitter, including the Device type, Serial Number,
Sensor ID, Firmware and Hardware Version, Manufacturer, and Electronic ID, is not modifiable.
Only Tag Number, Tag Name, Tag Date, and Message can be changed.

Figure L-11. Sample Identifier Tab Screen for a HART Transmitter

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 8 characters. The Tag Number becomes the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 16 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Tag Date Enter a date. It is possible to enter any valid future or past date. This
field may be used for storing the last calibration or maintenance date.
Message Enter maximum of 32 characters. Optional, used for company internal
designations, device numbers for material industry (business), final
alignment of the device, startup of the device, or any other purpose.

NOTE
Only capital letters can be used. No special symbols can be used.

267
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Input Tab Screen / Profibus PV Tab Screen

The Input tab screen (see Figure L-13) and Profibus PV tab screen (see Figure L-12) are very
similar. For FoxCom and HART devices, the Input tab screen is used. The Profibus device uses
the PV tab screen. The Profibus PV tab screen contains some additional features which are
described at the end of this chapter. Both tabs show the relevant information for the sensor input
(Device Type, Measurement Task, and maximum Span Limit). The equivalent value and unit for
the Span Limit may be entered here.

Figure L-12. Sample Profibus PV Tab Screen

The PV unit is centrally assigned for the complete device and is automatically displayed in the
Output screen according to the defined values. When a different pressure unit (for FoxCom or
HART device) is selected, a recalculation of the corresponding values in the Output tab screen
fields for Lower Range Value, Upper Range Value, and Upper Range Limit is also done. For
the Profibus Level device, the recalculation is only done between the length or volume units.

268
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure L-13. Sample Input Tab Screen

Device Type
Device Type shows the first part of the Model Code of the transmitter.

Measurement Task
The Measurement Task of the transmitter is displayed. The different measurement tasks are:
Pressure, Differential Pressure, Flow, Liquid Level, Liquid Interface, Liquid Density, or Special.

Span Limit
The maximum Span Limit and unit of the device type is displayed. This is specific for the
transmitter and cannot be changed.

Equivalent
In the second equivalent field, a different unit for the primary variable (PV Unit) can be specified.
You can select from the menu of choices or, if the required unit is not on the list, select Special.
When a different unit is selected, a recalculation of the corresponding value in the first field is
done. If Special is selected, a new Custom Unit field appears in which a unit can be freely
defined with a maximum of seven characters. In this case, you must define a conversion as follows:
Example 1: The upper sensor limit of 2.5 bar corresponds to a level of 6 m in the desired
application. Enter for equivalent 6 and for unit meter.

269
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Example 2: If you configure a square root characteristic in order to measure flow, calculate the
Upper Range Limit (URL) in flow units using the formula:
URL = SQR(nominal_range/URV) * URV(q)
with:
♦ Nominal range in pressure units
♦ URV: differential pressure URV in pressure units
♦ URV(q): upper range value in flow units.

! CAUTION
Always check the calculation of your conversion.

The PV Unit is centrally assigned for the complete device and is automatically displayed in the
Output screen according to the defined values. When a different pressure unit is selected, a
recalculation of the corresponding values in the Output Tab screen fields for Lower Range Value,
Upper Range Value, and Upper Range Limit is also done. For the Profibus Level device the
recalculation is only done between the length or volume units.
The Profibus device has the following additional features:
For commissioning and test purposes, it is possible for the Profibus device to simulate the
PV value and status. If simulation is enabled by checking the Enable check box, the
Transducer block and the Analog Input Function block (AI-FB) will be disconnected
within the device. Then the input and status values from the Transducer block in the AI-
FB can be modified. After checking the Enable box enter the PV Value and Status for
simulation.

Characterization Tab Screen

This screen enables a selection of a transformation function of the input signal. The choices are
Linear (Range +/- 110%), Square Root, and Custom Curve.
Square Root is intended for flow measurements. It includes a suppressed zero range of 7% of the
output range. Flow can be represented in flow units.
Custom Curve allows a specified characteristic consisting of up to 32 points (X/Y pairs) to be
entered. The input values (X-Values) are sorted in increasing order.
A customized characteristic which is stored in the device can be activated by selecting Custom
Curve or deactivated by switching to Linear or Square Root.

270
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure L-14. Sample Characterization Tab Screen

Output Tab Screen

The Output tab screen allows the configuration of the output signal. This includes the selection
of:
♦ The transfer function for the output (linear or square root)
♦ Reranging by selecting the Lower and Upper Range Values
♦ The output damping value
♦ The output mode.

271
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Figure L-15. Sample Output Tab Screen

Square Root Mode

The transfer function of the analog output can either be linear or square root. If the Square root
mode check box is activated, the transfer function is square root. A suppressed zero range is
activated automatically with the square root function. The selected analog output transfer
function has no effect on the measurement of the PV.

Lower and Upper Range Value

Changing the Lower Range Value (LRV) and the Upper Range Value (URV) allocates a section
from the nominal range to the signal range 4 to 20 mA via the measuring range. Both the Lower
Range Value and the Upper Range Value must be numerical values within the nominal range of
the sensor.

Output Damping
Damping values between 0 and 32 seconds can be entered. The adjustable damping corresponds
to the 63% value.

272
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Output Mode
It is possible to change the Output Mode between Analog (4 - 20 mA) and Multi-drop for HART
devices and between Analog (4 - 20 mA) and Digital for FoxCom devices. If Multi-drop is
selected, the Polling Address must be set between 1 and 15. In Multi-drop mode, the analog
output is frozen at 4 mA. IFDC/PC20 is able to connect and communicate with a transmitter
that is in Multi-drop mode, but only with one of them connected to the modem at a time.

Profibus Out Tab Screen

The Out tab screen for the Profibus devices allows the configuration of the out signal. The out
signal is defined in three steps:
♦ Define the Lower and Upper Range Values of the Out signal in Units of PV (on the
left side)
♦ On the right side of the screen specify an equivalent representation of the signal from
step 1 as Out signal:
♦ Equivalent Unit of the Out signal
♦ Value of the Equivalent to the Upper Range Value in Units of the Out signal
♦ Value of the Equivalent to the Lower Range Value in Units of the Out signal
♦ Number of Decimal Points for the representation of the Out signal.
♦ Define the Out signal characteristics:
♦ The Filter Time (output damping value)
♦ The Target Mode: Defines the desired mode.

Figure L-16. Sample Profibus Out Tab Screen

273
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Density Tab Screen

Density information can be displayed and entered for certain device types. This information is
stored in the transmitter.

Figure L-17. Sample Density Tab Screen

Failsafe Handling Tab Screen

The 140 Series has an extensive fail-safe management. With the Failsafe Handling screen, it is
possible to configure which errors will cause the device to go into the fail-safe state, which mA
value will be set on the output when it is in the fail-safe state, and how the device should return
from fail-safe (automatic or by command item Return from Failsafe).

274
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure L-18. Sample Failsafe Handling Tab Screen

Errors
By checking the different check boxes, you can configure which errors will bring the transmitter
into the fail-safe mode. If this box is not checked, a disturbance does not affect the analog output.

Failsafe Value
In this area, you can specify whether, in a fail-safe situation, the analog output is latched at the last
valid value or set to a value specified between 3.6 and 23 mA.

Reset Failsafe Value

In this area, you can specify the manner in which to reset fail-safe after a fail-safe condition is
corrected.
Selecting Auto automatically clears the latched fail-safe state and returns to normal measuring and
corresponding analog output when the reason for the fail-safe state is corrected.
Selecting Manual requires you to manually clear the fail-safe state via the Return from Failsafe
function.

275
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Device Tab Screen

In this screen, the local display and keys may be configured.

Figure L-19. Sample Device Tab Screen

If the Write Protected box is checked, the transmitter is write protected and the inadvertent
changing of the transmitter configuration is prevented.
There is an option of displaying the measured value on the local indicator of the transmitter. With
the Display selection, you can specify whether the indicator displays the measured value in the
standard or user-defined special units (Engineering Units) or displays the analog output in mA
(Analog Output) or as 0 to 100% (Percent of Range). If a local indicator is not used, configure
None.
The Keys selection controls the possibility of enabling and disabling the keys for URV and LRV
independently of each other. This prevents unintentional change of URV and LRV. The Damping
and Zero trim functions are always active via the keys.
With Frequency Rejection, it is possible to adapt the trouble suppression to the line frequency.

276
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Profibus Alarms Tab Screen

For a Profibus device, it is possible to define alarm conditions for the Out signal. Four alarms can
be defined:

Field Entry
Hystheresis When a measurement value is residing around a measurement limit (that is,
HIGH Data Limit) it is possible that the alarm indicator will trigger excessively
as the value drifts above and below the limit. To prevent this from occurring a
Hysteresis parameter is introduced. This parameter which is defined in % of
measurement span, allows the measurement value to pass through the trigger
value but requires the measurement value to change (%*span) in the opposite
direction before the trigger is released. The Hysteresis algorithm is applied to all
alarm triggers and the Hysteresis % value is user configurable.
High High Value for upper limit alarms:
Alarm Upper limit value for alarms with engineering unit of the OUT parameter. If
the measured variable is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the State
Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter
ALARM_SUM have to change to 1. The unit of this parameter is the same as
the OUT one.
High Alarm Value for upper limit warnings:
Upper limit value for warnings with engineering unit of the OUT parameter. If
the measured variable is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the State
Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter
ALARM_SUM have to change to 1. The unit of this parameter is the same as
the OUT one.
Low Alarm Value for lower limit warnings:
Lower limit value for warnings with engineering unit of the OUT parameter. If
the measured variable is equal to or lower than the lower limit value, the State
Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter
ALARM_SUM have to change to 1. The unit of this parameter is the same as
the OUT one.
Low Low Alarm Value for lower limit alarms:
Lower limit value for alarms with engineering unit of the OUT parameter. If
the measured variable is equal to or lower than the upper limit value the State
Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter
ALARM_SUM must change to 1. The unit of this parameter is the same as the
OUT one.

277
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Figure L-20. Sample Profibus Alarms Tab Screen

Calibration
NOTE
Whenever you perform any calibration, the Configuration Changed flag is set.

ReZero
This function enables you to adjust the zero offset of the pressure sensor. The compensation value
of the zero offset of the sensor is displayed in percent. It is accessed via the Calibration menu
from the device top level menu.
NOTE
Since the damping is active, the delay time must be observed or damping must be
reduced to 0 seconds during the calibration procedure.

The sensors for pressure and differential pressure can be calibrated by venting (for example, at the
valve block). For buoyancy level transmitters, apply the displacer (or a corresponding weight) and
ReZero the device. The signal range of the sensors is 0 to 10 mV. The displayed physical Zero
value shows the active correction factor in %.

278
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Figure L-21. Sample ReZero Calibration Screen

Point Calibration
This function enables you to calibrate the transmitter to your standards by applying reference
values to the input.
NOTE
Calibration of the lower point does not affect span. Calibration of the upper point
does not affect zero.

279
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Figure L-22. Sample Point Calibration Screen

1. Select Point Calibration from the Calibration menu.

2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. To calibrate the lower point, under Point to Calibrate, select lower.
4. Apply the lower calibration point pressure to the input.
5. When the displayed measurement is stable, enter your desired lower calibration point
and select Apply.
6. To calibrate the upper point, perform Steps 3 through 5 applying the upper
calibration point pressure and entering the upper calibration point.
7. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

280
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

mA Calibration
This procedure adjusts the 4 to 20mA output signal of the transmitter.

Figure L-23. Sample mA Calibration Screen

As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required.
However, the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the
output to the output of a specific receiving device. To do this, insert an accurate mA meter (or
digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop wiring. Perform the following procedure:
1. Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select 4 mA Output.
4. Enter the value from the mA meter in the Measured Value field on your screen and
select Apply.
5. Repeat Step 4 until the Measured Value equals the value on the meter.
6. Select 20 mA Output.
7. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
8. Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter.
9. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Restore Factory Calibration

This function changes the corrected values for the sensor trim done by Point Calibration back to
their default values. It is accessed via the Calibration menu from the device top level menu.

281
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

Specification

Sensor Tab Screen

The Sensor Tab screen displays sensor specific information which is stored in the transmitter. It is
accessed via the View menu from the device top level menu.

Figure L-24. Sample Specification Sensor Tab Screen

282
Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Displacer Tab Screen

The Displacer Tab screen is only displayed for the 144LVD and 144LD devices. The screen
displays displacer specific information which is stored in the transmitter. It is accessed via the
View menu from the device top level menu.

Figure L-25. Sample Specification Displacer Tab Screen

283
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix L. 140/130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters

284
Appendix M. 870ITCR
Conductivity/Resistivity
Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 870ITCR transmitters in regards to
the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure M-1. Sample 870ITCR Device Data Screen

285
 MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Error Messages
Table 32. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line.
If this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Init Required Transmitter is reinitializing If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line.
on reset. If this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Diagnostic Error Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine
diagnostic error. problem and corrective action.
Secondary Status Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in
Error secondary status. Column 2 of the screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Measurement Error Unstable process Check sensor connection. Select Test > Go
measurement. On-Line. If this does not clear problem,
contact the CSC.
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line.
If this does not clear problem, contact the
CSC.
Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not
Received bad message. clear problem, contact the CSC.
Stability Error Raw measurement has Check wiring. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
been unstable. this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Probe Error Problem with the sensor. Replace sensor.
Temp Comp Error Problem in temperature Check ATC connection. Verify process
measurement. temperature. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Amplifier Error Out-of-range error. Check sensor. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Extended Status - Hardware
ATC Open Resistance of temperature Replace temperature compensator.
ATC Short compensation is greater or less
than expected resistance of
device configured.
Leak Error Solution leakage into sensor. Replace sensor.
App1 Cal Req Application 1 calibration Calibrate.
required.
App2 Cal Req Application 2 calibration Calibrate.
required.

286
 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 32. Transmitter Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

App3 Cal Req Application 3 calibration Calibrate.
required.
Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem in Recalibrate the transmitter. If problem persists,
the previous calibration. contact the CSC.
Cal Slope Error A slope error has Check sensor and recalibrate transmitter. If the
occurred as the result problem persists, contact the CSC.
of the previous calibration.
RTD Cal Tolerance RTD calibration is not Recalibrate the RTD. If problem persists,
within tolerance. contact the CSC.
Therm Cal Thermistor calibration Recalibrate the thermistor. If problem persists,
Tolerance is not within tolerance. contact the CSC.
Tune Stability Calibration measurement Check stability configuration or replace sensor.
not stabilized.
Amp Failure Overrange condition on Check sensor and transmitter connections.
raw measurement. Select Test > Go On-Line. If this does not
clear problem, contact the CSC.
Extended Status - Process
mA Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure range or correct process error.
mA Over Range over configured range.
Comp Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure compensation or correct process
Comp Over Range over compensation range. error.
Disp Under Range Primary measurement Check sensor connection. Select Test > Go
Disp Over Range is too low or too high. On-Line. If this does not clear problem,
contact the CSC.
Unstable Temp Unstable temperature Check ATC connection. Verify process
measurement. temperature. Select Test > Go On-Line. If
this does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Unstable Meas Unstable process Check measurement sensor connection. Select
measurement. Test > Go On-Line. If this does not clear
problem, contact the CSC.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 870ITCR transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurator:
♦ Bench Calibration
♦ Calibration Pure H2O
♦ Solution 1-Point Offset
♦ Solution 1-Point Span
♦ Solution 2-Point

287
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

♦ Temperature Sensor
♦ mA Calibration.

Bench Calibration
You can perform a bench calibration for either conductivity or resistivity measurements by
connecting your own discrete components to the transmitter.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration
function. See page 295.
2. Select Bench Calibration from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Enter the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Wait while the device is reinitializing.
6. Follow the prompt to connect Resistor 1 between terminals 1B and 1E and select
Continue.
7. Wait while the device is calibrating.
8. Follow the prompt to connect Resistor 2 or the specified capacitor in place of
Resistor 1 and select Continue.
9. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Calibration Pure H2O

If you are measuring purity of water by checking the conductivity in µS/cm or resistivity in
MΩ•cm with an 871CR-A or 871CR-B sensor, you can use this calibration.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the
Configuration function. See page 295.
2. Select Calibration Pure H2O from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Enter the temperature cell factor (tCF) and cell factor (CF) found on your sensor. Also
enter the calibrator’s initials and select Continue.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

288
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Solution 1-Point Offset

This option permits you to set a 1-point offset for up to three applications and is normally used to
correct for zero shift. This should be used only if you have previously performed a 2-point
calibration.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the
Configuration function. See page 295.
2. Select Solution 1-Point Offset from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure M-2. Sample 870ITCR Solution 1-Point Offset Screen

4. Enter the solution value and the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Wait while the device is reinitializing.
6. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
7. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
8. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

289
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Solution 1-Point Span

This option permits you to set a calibration point (1-point span) for up to three applications. This
is usually done to correct for a cell factor change due to installation. It should be used only if you
have previously performed a 2-point calibration. The point selected should be at the high end of
the measurement range.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the
Configuration function. See page 295.
2. Select Solution 1-Point Span from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure M-3. Sample 870ITCR Solution 1-Point Span Screen

4. Enter the solution value and the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Wait while the device is reinitializing.
6. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
7. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
8. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

290
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Solution 2-Point
This option permits you to perform a 2-point calibration for up to three applications.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the
Configuration function. See page 295.
2. Select Solution 2-Point from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure M-4. Sample 870ITCR Solution 2-Point Calibration Screen

4. Enter the low and high solution values and the calibrator’s initials, and select
Continue.
5. Wait while the device is reinitializing.
6. Immerse the sensor in the low calibration solution and select Continue.
7. Wait while the device is calibrating.
8. Immerse the sensor in the high calibration solution and select Continue.
9. Wait while the device is calibrating. The current calibration date is automatically
updated.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

291
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Temperature Sensor
This option permits you to calibrate the temperature sensor to the known temperature of a
solution.
1. Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the
Configuration function. See page 295.
2. Select Temperature Sensor from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

Figure M-5. Sample 870ITCR Temperature Calibration

4. Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator’s initials, and select Continue.
5. Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue.
6. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

mA Calibration
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required.
However, the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the
output to the output of a specific receiving device.
The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Output from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.

292
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

4. Select 4 mA Output.
5. Set the Step Size (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen display.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurement.

Figure M-6. Sample 870ITCR mA Calibration Screen

293
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure M-7. Sample 870ITCR Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters
become the transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with
I/A Series Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for
reference only.

294
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Sensor Tab Screen

Figure M-8. Sample 870ITCR Sensor Tab Screen

Field Entry
Sensor Configuration
Applications Number of applications to be configured. Select 1, 2, or 3
applications.
Application Select Select 1, 2, 3, or AUTO.
Probe Type Specify 2 Electrode.
Cell Constant Specify 0.1, 10, or Other.
Cell Factor If sensor type is Other, specify cell factor between 00.00 and 99.99.
Outputs
mA Output Mode Select Digital or 4-20 mA.
Damping Select damping response time of 1, 5, 10, 20, 40, or 120 seconds.

295
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Measurement Tab Screen

Figure M-9. Sample 870ITCR Measurement Tab Screen

Field Entry
Temperature
Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit
Mode Select Automatic (follows RTD) or Manual (fixed point).
Failure Value If Mode is Automatic, enter temperature in case RTD fails.
Manual Temperature If Mode is Manual, enter temperature.
Temperature Sensor Select 2-wire 100 Ω, 2-wire 1000 Ω, 3-wire 100 Ω, or
3-wire 1000 Ω RTD, or 100 kΩ. thermistor.
Measurement Stability
Measurement Stability √ = Instrument Stability Measurement Feature On;
Active Blank = Instrument Stability Measurement Feature Off
Stability Time If on, enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5-second increments.
Stability Variant If on, enter variant between 1 and 9.
Temperature Stability
Temperature Stability √ = Instrument Stability Temperature Feature On;
Active Blank = Instrument Stability Temperature Feature Off
Stability Time If on, enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5-second increments.
Stability Variant If on, enter variant between 1 and 9.

296
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Misc Tab Screen

Figure M-10. Sample 870ITCR Misc Tab Screen

Field Entry
Diagnostics
Leakage
ATC Short
ATC Open
√ = Enable error messages; Blank = Disable error messages
Compensation Range
mA Range
Measurement Range
Enable All Enables all messages listed above.
Disable All Disables all messages listed above.
Local Display
Major Passcode Enter 4-digit passcode.
Minor Passcode Enter 4-digit passcode.
Display Timeout Enter timeout between 0 and 999 seconds.

297
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Application Tab Screen

Figure M-11. Sample 870ITCR App1 Tab Screen

Field Entry
Display
Custom Units √ = Custom; Blank = Not Custom
Primary Units If not Custom, select from menu of choices.
If Custom, select %, g/l, ppm, oz/gal, ppt, or None.
Temp Compensation Select from menu of choices.
Primary Scale Select from menu of choices.
Full Scale Enter value up to full scale limit.
Temp Linear % Enter value from 0 to 100,
Secondary Display Select Temp, Absolute, or mA .
mA Output
Output If Analog Output Mode on sensor screen, specify Absolute,
Measurement, or Temperature.
Max. Enter 20 mA range value.
Min. Enter 4 mA range value.
Failsafe
Mode Specify Off, On, or Pulse

298
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Value If on, enter dc mA output between 3.8 and 20.5 mA.
Application Switch Triggers Enter value of Low and High triggers.

Database Report
Table 33. Sample Database Report
Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 30 Reference Temp #3 0
Tag Number FT102 Temp Size App #1 02
Tag Name 870ITCR Temp Size App #2 02
Device Name DevNam Temp Size App #3 02
Geo Location Office Chem Units #1 06
Application Select 00 Chem Units #2 01
Probe 00 Chem Units #3 01
Cell Factor 0.1 Absolute Scale #1 02
Primary Units #1 02 Absolute Scale #2 00
Primary Units #2 02 Absolute Scale #3 00
Primary Units #3 02 Custom Chem Scale #1 103
Custom Units #1 04 Custom Chem Scale #2 200
Custom Units #2 00 Custom Chem Scale #3 300
Custom Units #3 00 Meas #1 Units kohms
Primary Scale #1 09 Measurement Mapping 00 00 00 00
Primary Scale #2 09 Output Range Max 1000
Primary Scale #3 09 Output Range Min 0
Prim Scale CMCP #1 00 TON Count (20 mA) 26533
Prim Scale CMCP #2 02 TON Count (4 mA) 5307
Prim Scale CMCP #3 02 Meas #2 Units C
Prim Scale CMRG #1 0 Temp Units #1 01
Prim Scale CMRG #2 0 Temp Units #2 01
Prim Scale CMRG #3 0 Temp Units #3 01
Display Second #1 01 Chem Size Appl #1 15
Display Second #2 00 Chem Size Appl #2 02
Display Second #3 00 Chem Size Appl #3 02
Temp Comp TPCP #1 04 Temp Comp Temp 1 #1 10
Temp Comp TPCP #2 16 Temp Comp Val 1 #1 0
Temp Comp TPCP #3 04 Temp Comp Temp 2 #1 10
Temp Comp #1 1 Temp Comp Val 2 #1 0
Temp Comp #2 0.5 Temp Comp Temp 3 #1 10
Temp Comp #3 0.5 Temp Comp Val 3 #1 0
Reference Temp #1 20 Temp Comp Temp 4 #1 10
Reference Temp #2 0 Temp Comp Val 4 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 5 #1 10 Temp Comp Val 2 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 5 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 3 #2 0

299
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Table 33. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Temp Comp Temp 6 #1 10 Temp Comp Val 3 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 6 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 4 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 7 #1 10 Temp Comp Val 4 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 7 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 5 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 8 #1 10 Temp Comp Val 5 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 8 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 6 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 9 #1 10 Temp Comp Val 6 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 9 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 7 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 10 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 7 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 10 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 8 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 11 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 8 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 11 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 9 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 12 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 9 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 12 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 10 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 13 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 10 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 13 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 11 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 14 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 11 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 14 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 12 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 15 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 12 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 15 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 13 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 16 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 13 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 16 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 14 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 17 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 14 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 17 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 15 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 18 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 15 #2 -0
Temp Comp Val 18 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 16 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 19 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 16 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 19 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 17 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 20 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 17 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 20 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 18 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 21 #1 0 Temp Comp Val 18 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 21 #1 0 Temp Comp Temp 19 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 1 #2 0 Temp Comp Val 19 #2 0
Temp Comp Val 1 #2 0 Temp Comp Temp 20 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 2 #2 0 Temp Comp Val 20 #2 0
Temp Comp Temp 21 #2 0 Temp Comp Val 18 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 21 #2 0 Temp Comp Temp 19 #3 0
Temp Comp Temp 1 #3 0 Temp Comp Val 19 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 1 #3 0 Temp Comp Temp 20 #3 0
Temp Comp Temp 2 #3 0 Temp Comp Val 20 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 2 #3 0 Temp Comp Temp 21 #3 0
Temp Comp Temp 3 #3 0 Temp Comp Val 21 #3 0
Temp Comp Val 3 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 1 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 4 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 1 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 4 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 2 #1 0

300
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 33. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Temp Comp Temp 5 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 2 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 5 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 3 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 6 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 3 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 6 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 4 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 7 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 4 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 7 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 8 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 5 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 8 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 9 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 6 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 9 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 10 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 7 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 10 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 11 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 8 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 11 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 9 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 12 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 9 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 12 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 10 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 13 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 10 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 13 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 11 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 14 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 11 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 14 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 12 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 15 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 12 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 15 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 13 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 16 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 13 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 16 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 14 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 17 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 14 #1 0
Temp Comp Val 17 #3 0 Chem Comp Temp 15 #1 0
Temp Comp Temp 18 #3 0 Chem Comp Val 15 #1 0
Chem Comp Temp 16 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 13 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 16 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 14 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 17 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 14 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 17 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 15 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 18 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 15 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 18 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 16 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 19 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 16 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 19 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 17 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 20 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 17 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 20 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 18 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 21 #1 0 Chem Comp Val 18 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 21 #1 0 Chem Comp Temp 19 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 1 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 19 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 1 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 20 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 2 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 20 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 2 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 21 #2 0
Chem Comp Temp 3 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 21 #2 0
Chem Comp Val 3 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 1 #3 0

301
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Table 33. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Chem Comp Temp 4 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 1 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 4 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 2 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 5 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 2 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 5 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 3 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 6 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 3 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 6 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 4 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 7 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 4 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 7 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 8 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 5 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 8 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 9 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 6 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 9 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 10 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 7 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 10 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 11 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 8 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 11 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 9 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 12 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 9 #3 0
Chem Comp Val 12 #2 0 Chem Comp Temp 10 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 13 #2 0 Chem Comp Val 10 #3 0
Chem Comp Temp 11 #3 0 Temperature Units 00
Chem Comp Val 11 #3 0 Temperature Mode 00
Chem Comp Temp 12 #3 0 Temp Auto Mode 40
Chem Comp Val 12 #3 0 Temp Manual Mode 100
Chem Comp Temp 13 #3 0 Temp Type 04
Chem Comp Val 13 #3 0 Damp 02
Chem Comp Temp 14 #3 0 Meas Stability 01
Chem Comp Val 14 #3 0 Meas Stability Time 05
Chem Comp Temp 15 #3 0 Meas Stability Var 09
Chem Comp Val 15 #3 0 Temp Stability 00
Chem Comp Temp 16 #3 0 Temp Stability Time 00
Chem Comp Val 16 #3 0 Temp Stability Var 09
Chem Comp Temp 17 #3 0 Timeout 600
Chem Comp Val 17 #3 0 Minor Passcode 0
Chem Comp Temp 18 #3 0 Major Passcode 0
Chem Comp Val 18 #3 0 Number Applications 00
Chem Comp Temp 19 #3 0 Trigger: #1 High 9.999
Chem Comp Val 19 #3 0 Trigger: #2 Low -1e+010
Chem Comp Temp 20 #3 0 Trigger: #2 High 0
Chem Comp Val 20 #3 0 Trigger: #3 Low 0
Chem Comp Temp 21 #3 0 Hold Configuration 00
Chem Comp Val 21 #3 0 mA Hold Value -3.402823e+38
Analog Output #1 01 Meas 1 Hold Value -1.469368e-039
Analog Output #2 01 Temp Hold Value 0
Analog Output #3 01 Absolute Hold Value 0
Lower Range Value #1 0 Cal Name (App 1): GTF

302
Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 33. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Lower Range Value #2 0 Cal Name (App 2): STD
Lower Range Value #3 0 Cal Name (App 3): GTF
Upper Range Value #1 0.2 Cal Date: #1 4/16/98
Upper Range Value #2 0.2 Cal Date: #2 4/23/98
Upper Range Value #3 0.2 Cal Date: #3 4/30/98
Output Failsafe #1 00 Sales Order Number 95F0000000010001
Output Failsafe #2 00 MS Code 870ITCR
Output Failsafe #3 00 Software Version 53 56 4e 5f
Output mA #1 -0.0125 Low Meas Cal #1 0
Output mA #2 -0.0125 Low Meas Cal #2 10
Output mA #3 -0.0125 Low Meas Cal #3 25
High Meas Cal #1 95 Thermistor Cal (#1) 100000
High Meas Cal #2 25 Thermistor Cal (#2) 2.5
High Meas Cal #3 35
Kernal Major Rev # 00
Kernal Minor Rev # 04
SREVMJ 01
SREVMN 14
Display Major Rev # 00
Display Minor Rev # 00
Parameter Tbl Offset c9 3b
Parameter Table CRC bf 0e
Parameter Table Type 00
Parameter Table Size 00 ff
Reserved 00 00 00
Calibration Req’d 06
Core Manufact. Date 1/1/94
Output Mode 01
Enable/Disable Diag c3 f0 f0 c3
Clear Diagnostics 00 00 00 00
Low Cal Point KCL 1 0
Low Cal Point KCL 2 0
Low Cal Point KCL 3 0
High Cal Point KCH 1 1
High Cal Point KCH 2 1
High Cal Point KCH 3 1
Low Cal Point VCL 1 0
Low Cal Point VCL 2 0
Low Cal Point VCL 3 0
Temperature Offset 0
User In 0
Drive 0 Amp Offset 0
Drive 90 Amp Offset 0
Meas 0 Amp Offset 0
Meas 90 Amp Offset 0

303
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix M. 870ITCR Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Table 33. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Freq Conv Factor 500000
Ohm Ref Res 140
K Ref Resistance 1960

304
Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART
Devices
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to non Foxboro HART devices in regard to
the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Configuration.
NOTE
For information on any of the parameters shown on screens in this appendix, refer
to information from your product’s manufacturer and/or the HART Foundation.

Device Data Screen

Figure N-1. Sample Non Foxboro Device Data Screen

305
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure N-2. Sample Non Foxboro Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Enter the device tag with a maximum of 8 characters.
Descriptor Enter the device descriptor with a maximum of 16 characters.
Date Enter the date.
Message Enter the message with maximum of 32 characters.

306
Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices MI 020-495 – November 2002

Input Tab Screen

Figure N-3. Generic HART Input Screen

Field Entry
Lower Range Limit Shows the Lower Range Limit of the
device.
Upper Range Limit Shows the Upper Range Limit of the
device.
Primary Variable Units Enter the units of the Primary variable.
Minimum Span Shows the minimum span of the device.

307
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices

Output Tab Screen

Figure N-4. Sample Non Foxboro Output Tab Screen

Field Entry
Lower Range Limit Shows value of Lower Range Limit of device.
Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of device.
Lower Range Value (LRV) Enter value at which device outputs 4 mA.
Upper Range Value (URV) Enter value at which device outputs 20 mA.
Output Damping Enter damping value from 0 to 32 seconds.
Transfer Function Select from menu of selections. Most often Linear or Square
Root.

308
Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices MI 020-495 – November 2002

HART Tab Screen

Figure N-5. Generic HART Screen

Field Entry
Polling Address Enter the polling address for the HART device.
Number of Preambles Enter the number of preambles.
Universal Command Revision Shows the revision of the universal commands.
Device Command Revision Shows the revision of the device commands.

309
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices

Commands Dialog Box

Figure N-6. Generic HART Commands Dialog Box to Execute Universal and
Common Practice Commands.

Only the Universal and Common Usage commands are supported on non Foxboro devices.
Device-specific commands are not supported. The Commands dialog box enables you to read
and/or write data on the selected command. Select the menu item Edit > Command to start the
Command dialog box.
To view the list of Universal commands, click on the symbol to the left of Universal. Clicking on
a specific command causes the read and/or write button to be highlighted and the present
information on that command to be displayed. The Universal commands are listed in Table 34.
Also shown is their read/write capability.

Table 34. Universal Commands

Command Read/Write Capability

Identifier R
Primary Variable R
Current/% Range R
Dynamic Variables R
Poll Address W
Message R/W
Tag R/W
PV Sensor R
Output R
Final Assembly R/W

310
Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices MI 020-495 – November 2002

To view the list of Common Usage commands, click on the symbol to the left of Common Usage.
Clicking on a specific command causes the read and/or write button to be highlighted and the
present information on that command to be displayed. The Common Usage commands are listed
in Table 35. Also shown is their read/write capability.

Table 35. Common Usage Commands

Read/Write Read/Write
Command Capability Command Capability
Device Variables R Variable Damping W
Damping W Variable Sensor ID W
Range Values W Unit Tag R/W
SPAN W Preamplifier W
ZERO W Analog/% Range R
Reset Changed Flag W Dynamic Analog R
EEPROM W Analog Output R
Fixed mA W Analog Information R
Self Test W Analog Damp W
Reset W Analog Range W
PV Zero W Analog Fixed W
PV Units W Trim Analog Zero W
Trim Zero W Trim Analog Gain W
Trim Gain W Analog Transfer W
Transfer Function W Analog Endpoint R
PV Serial W Burst Variables W
Dynamic Variables W Burst Command W
Variable Zero W Burst Mode Enable W
Variable Units W Dynamic Variables R
Variable Information W

Calibration
The standard Calibration procedures are ReRange, mA Calibration, and ReZero. They may or
may not be accessible for your device.

Test
The standard Test procedures are Device Status, Set mA/Pulse Output, Reset, Self Test, and
Message. They may or may not be accessible for your device.

311
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix N. Non Foxboro HART Devices

312
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow
Transmitters
This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters
in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators. It contains information on:
♦ Device Data Screen
♦ Device Error Messages
♦ Calibration
♦ Pulse Preset
♦ Configuration
♦ Database Report.

Device Data Screen

Figure O-1. Sample IMT96 Device Data Screen

313
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Error Messages
Table 36. Transmitter Status Error Messages

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Primary Status Fields
Device Busy Transmitter is busy. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Init Required Initializing is required. If problem persists, select Test > Go On-Line. If this
does not clear problem, contact the CSC.
Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to
Error diagnostic error. determine problem and corrective action.
Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the
Status Error secondary status. screen display.
Secondary Status Fields
Signal Lock External contact is off. Set by user; no action required.
Off
Startup Test Transmitter cannot Correct Diagnostic Error or Secondary Status Error also
exit its boot code. displayed.
Electrode Test Unreliable measure- See Extended Status - Hardware below.
ment of electrode
voltage.
Coil Test Unreliable measure- See Extended Status - Hardware below.
ment of coil current.
Extended Status - Hardware
Coils
Low Coil Transmitter unable to Check coil wiring at flowtube and transmitter.
Current Test generate a reliable
High Coil measurement of coil Service is required.
Current Test current.
Positive Coil Check wiring and flowtube coil.
Test
Negative Coil
Test
Electrodes
Electrode in Transmitter unable to Check signal wiring between flowtube and transmitter.
Range Test generate a reliable Also see MI 020-391.
Positive measurement of
Electrode Test electrode voltage.
Negative
Electrode Test

314
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Table 36. Transmitter Status Error Messages (Continued)

Message Explanation Recommended Action

Setup
MultiRange Setup needed. Check that Configuration and Contact Inputs 1 and 2
Setup are set up properly.
Extended Status - Process
Process Problems
Signal Lock Signal lock is on. Check that Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are activated by an
Test external set of contacts or switch.
Pulses Lag Totalizer putting out Reconfigure totalizer display so that each pulse
Total Test pulses at the maximum represents a larger volume.
rate but falling behind
the actual total.
Total Rollover Total exceeds limit of Reconfigure total format if necessary and reset totals.
Test configured format.
A to D Electronics problem. Service is required.
Calibration Test
Alarms
High Flow Flow above configured Make process change or reconfigure alarm setpoint.
high flow rate.
Low Flow Flow below configured
low flow rate.
High Forward Total above configured Make process change or reconfigure Tot Alm Setpt and
Total 1 High Fwd Tot 1. reset totals.
High Forward Total above configured
Total 2 High Fwd Tot 2.

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT96 transmitter using the
Intelligent Field Device Configurator:
♦ mA Output
♦ Reset Totals
♦ Zero Flow
♦ Restore Zero Flow Default.

315
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

mA Output
As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory, this function is not normally required.
However, the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the
output to the output of a specific receiving device.
The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration is:
1. Insert an accurate mA meter (or digital voltmeter and precision resistor) in the loop
wiring.
2. Select mA Output from the Calibration menu.
3. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
4. Select 4 mA Output.
5. Set the Step Size (-0.5, -0.05, -0.005, 0.005, 0.05, 0.5), and select Apply.
6. Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output. The cumulative change is shown
on the screen display.
7. Select 20 mA Output.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. When finished, select Continue.
9. The screen then displays the adjustments. To accept this change, select Continue.
10. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurement.

Figure O-2. Sample IMT96 mA Calibration Screen

316
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Reset Totals
This procedure resets the transmitter totals. The Net, Forward and Reverse Totals are reset as a
group. The Grand Total is individually reset.
1. Select Reset Totals from the Calibration menu or the Reset Totals icon from the
device toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select the device total(s) to reset to zero. You can select Net, Forward, and Reverse
Totals or Grand Total. Then select Continue.

Figure O-3. Sample IMT96 Reset Totals Screen

4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Zero Flow
This procedure causes the device to rezero the measurement when zero flow is in the flowtube.
1. Select Zero Flow from the Calibration menu or the Zero Flow icon from the device
toolbar.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Select Continue when zero flow is present in the flowtube.
4. Wait while the device is zeroing.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

317
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Restore Zero Flow Default

This procedure restores the factory zero setting.
1. Select Restore Zero Flow Default from the Calibration menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Wait while the factory zero setting is restored.
4. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurements.

Pulse Preset
1. Select Pulse Preset from the Test menu.
2. Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue.
3. Enter a value to set as the pulse rate and select Apply.
4. Select Continue when done testing.
5. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode. Select Continue to
resume dynamic measurement.

318
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Configuration
Identifier Tab Screen

Figure O-4. Sample IMT96 Identifier Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters. The first 8 characters become the
transmitter filename.
Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters.
NOTE: To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I/A Series
Versions 3.0 or later, enter DevNam.
Location Enter maximum of 14 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

319
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Flow Tab Screen

Figure O-5. Sample IMT96 Flow Tab Screen

Field Entry
Flow Settings
Engineering Units Select from menu of choices or Custom.
Flow Direction Select Positive, Reverse, BiDir Positive, or BiDir Reverse.
Analog and Pulse Enter damping response time from 0.0 to 99.9 seconds.
Rate Output Damp.
Flow Rate Format Select from menu of eight choices.
Meter Factor Enter the “IMT96 Cal Fact” factor or see Mounting Hardware Kits
To Replace 823DP, 843DP, and 863DP With IDP10 Differential
Pressure Transmitters (MI 021-412).
Output Mode
Digital Select UniDirectional or BiDirectional flow.
Analog Select UniDirectional, Unidirectional Multi-Range,
BiDirectional Dual Range, or BiDirectional Split Range.
Upper Range Values Enter Upper Range Values in units shown.
Pulse Output
Mode Select Off, Pulse Rate, or Pulse Total.

320
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Upper Range Value If Pulse Rate Mode, enter Pulse Out URV between minimum and
maximum URV of the flowtube (not greater than 999999).
Rate Max Frequency If Pulse Rate Mode, select Rate Max Frequency of 1000, 2000,
5000, or 10000 Hz.
Total Max Frequency If Pulse Total Mode, select Total Max Frequency of 10 or 100 Hz.

Alarms Tab Screen

Figure O-6. Sample IMT96 Alarms Tab Screen

Field Entry
For All Alarms
Alarming Enabled √ = On; Blank = Off.
Clear Alarms Automatically √ = Auto; Blank = Manual.
Blink On Alarm √ = Blink; Blank = Don’t Blink.
Rate Output Response Select No effect, Go Downscale, or Go Upscale.
Alarm Display Definition
High Flow Rate √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point and Deadband.
Low Flow Rate √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point and Deadband.

321
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field Entry
High Forward Total 1 √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point.
High Forward Total 2 √ = On; Blank = Off. If On, enter Set Point.
Empty Pipe √ = On; Blank = Off.
Turn On All Turns all alarms on.
Turn Off All Turns all alarms off.

Contacts Tab Screen

Figure O-7. Sample IMT96 Contacts Tab Screen

Field Entry
Contacts
Contact 1 Function Select Off, Ack Alarm, Reset Net Total, Reset Gr Total, Reset All
Total, Multi-range, or Signal Lock.
Contact 1 Operation If Contact 1 Function is not off, select Normally Open or Normally
Closed.
Contact 2 Function Similar to Contact 1 Function.
Contact 2 Operation Similar to Contact 1 Operation
Relay 1

322
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Relay Function Select Off, Alarm, Alarm & Diag, Diagnostics, Flow Direction, or
Test Mode.
Relay Alarm If Relay Function is not off, select High Rate, Low Rate,
High Forward Total 1, High Forward Total 2, Empty Pipe, or Any
Alarm.
Relay Operation If Relay Function is not off, select Normally Open or Normally
Closed.
Suppress Relay If Relay Function is not off, select Yes to suppress reactivation of an
alarm or No for no suppression.
Relay 2 (Similar to Relay 1)

Options Tab Screen

Figure O-8. Sample IMT96 Options Tab Screen

Field Entry
Tube Identification
Model Code Enter model code of flowtube.
Serial Number Enter serial number of flowtube.
Diagnostics

323
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field Entry
Rate Response Select Go Downscale or Go Upscale.
Diagnostics
Blink On Diagnostic Error √ = Blink; Blank = Don’t Blink.
Functional Security at the IMT96 Keypad
Enable Passcode 1 √ = Enable; Blank = Disable. If Enabled, select Setup, Totals
Reset, Setup & Totals, Test Mode, Test Mode & Setup, Test
Mode and Totals, or Test Mode, Setup & Totals. Then enter 4
digit passcode.
Enable Passcode 2 Similar to Enable Passcode 1.
Noise Reduction √ = On; Blank = Off.
Empty Pipe Detection √ = On; Blank = Off.
Line Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Empty Pipe Effect Select No Effect or Auto Signal Lock.

Display/Totalizer Tab Screen

Figure O-9. Sample IMT96 Display/Totalizer Tab Screen

324
Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 020-495 – November 2002

Field Entry
Display Preferences
Dual Display On √ = On; Blank = Off.
Display Line 1 If Dual Display On is checked (√ ), select from menu of six
choices.
Display Line 2 If Dual Display On is checked (√ ), select from menu of six
choices.
Default Display Select from menu of seven choices.
Flow Display Damping Enter damping response time for local display between 0.00
and 99.9 seconds.
Totals
Total On √ = On; Blank = Off.
Totalizer Units If Totalizer On is checked (√ ), select Gal, Lit, or Custom.
Format for Grand Total If Totalizer On is checked (√ ), select from menu of eight
choices.
Format for Forward, If Totalizer On is checked (√ ), select from menu of eight
Reverse, and Net Totals choices.

Database Report
NOTE
If a parameter in the report is “UNUSED,” the corresponding value shown has no
meaning for that device.

Table 37. Sample Database Report

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Transmitter Type # 28 Tot 1 Alarm Set Poin 100000
Tag Number REV B #1 Tot 2 Alarm On 00
Tag Name IMT96 Tot 2 Alarm Set Poin 1000000
Device Name DevNam Rate Response Alarm 01
Geo Location lab Display Response Ala 00
Date of Manufacture 01/25/00 Alarm Clear 01
Transmitter MS Code IMT96-PEADB10Z-A Rate Response Diag 00
Transmitter Serial N 99420443 Display Response Dia 01
Tube MS Code 1 TUBEMS Tube Serial Number TUBES/N
Tube MS Code 2 Passcode 1 On 00
Write Protect 00 Pass 1 Protect 00
Default Display 00 Passcode 1 0
Dual Display On/Off 00 Passcode 2 On 00
Dual Display Line 1 00 Pass 2 Protect 01
Dual Display Line 2 00 Passcode 2 2

325
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Appendix O. IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Table 37. Sample Database Report (Continued)

Parameter Value Parameter Value
Rate EGU M1 00 Line Frequency 3c
Flow Rate Units M1 GPM Flow Direction 00
EGU Rate Factor 1 Contact In 1 Functio 00
Raw Rate Format 06 Contact In 1 Operati 01
Rate Damping 3 Contact In 2 Functio 00
Totalizer On/Off 00 Contact In 2 Operati 00
Rate EGU M2 00 Noise Reduction On 01
Total Rate Units M2 Gal TON Count (20 mA) 26102
EGU Totals Slope 1 TON Count (4 mA) 5113
Tot/Net Format 04 Meter Factor Use 12.19999
Grand Total Format 04 Cal Date 01/25/00
Output Mode 01 Cal Name JB
Digital Mode 01 mA Hold Value 0
Analog Mode 00 Pulse Hold 0
Upper Range Limit #1 200 Kernal Major Revisio 00
Upper Range Limit #2 25 Kernal Minor Revisio 00
Upper Range Limit #3 5 SREVMAJ 00
Pulse Output Mode 00 SREVMIN 00
Pulse Out URV 100 Display Major Revisi 00
Rate Max Freq 02 Display Minor Revisi 00
Tot Max Freq 00 Parameter Table Offs 00 00
Rate Out Damp 1.1 Parameter Table CRC 3e 5a
Relay 1 Function 00 Parameter Table Type 49
Relay 1 Alarm 01 Parameter Table Size 45 56
Relay 1 Operation 01 Reserved 49 4e 47
Relay 1 Suppression 00 REV_INFO c0
Relay 2 Function 00 UNUSED 1/25/00
Relay 2 Alarm 01 Sensor Minor Revisio 03
Relay 2 Operation 01 Sensor Major Revisio 01
Relay 2 Suppression 00 UNUSED 49649
Alarms On 00 UNUSED 49649
High Alarm On 00 UNUSED 11
High Alarm Set Point 200 M1 Offset 0
High Alarm Deadband 10 Subtype 01
Low Alarm On 00 Database Change Count ce
Low Alarm Set Point 0
Low Alarm Deadband O 0
Tot 1 Alarm On 00

326
Index

130
Calibration 278
Configuration 266
Device Data Screen 262
140
Calibration 278
Configuration 266
Device Data Screen 262
Device Status Screen 263
Devices with I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Compatibility 257
Specification Information 282
820
Calibration 74
Configuration 82
Database Report 86
Device Data Screen 71
Error Messages 72
83
Calibration 182
Configuration 186
Database Report 191
Device Data Screen 179
Error Messages 180
860
Calibration 74
Configuration 82
Database Report 86
Device Data Screen 71
Error Messages 72
870ITCR
Configuration 294
Database Report 299
Device Data Screen 285
Error Messages 286
870ITEC
Calibration 196
Configuration 202
Database Report 207
Device Data Screen 193
Error Messages 194
870ITPH
Calibration 216

327
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Index

Configuration 220
Database Report 227
Device Data Screen 213, 285
Error Messages 214

A
Audit Trail Info Window 27

C
Calibration
130 278
140 278
820 74
83 182
860 74
870ITEC 196
870ITPH 216
CFT10 150
CFT15 167
I/A Series Pressure 74
IMT10/IMT20 121
IMT25 134
IMT96 315
RTT10 90
RTT20 103
SRD991 235
Calibration Function 52
CFT10
Calibration 150
Configuration 154
Database Report 161
Device Data Screen 147
Error Messages 148
CFT15
Calibration 167
Configuration 169
Database Report 176
Device Data Screen 163
Error Messages 164
Comments Function 52
Compare Function 51
Configuration
130 266
140 266
820 82
83 186

328
Index MI 020-495 – November 2002

860 82
870ITCR 294
870ITEC 202
870ITPH 220
CFT10 154
CFT15 169
I/A Series Pressure 82
IMT10/IMT20 124
IMT25 138, 319
IMT96 319
Non Foxboro Devices 306
RTT10 97
RTT20 111
SRD991 241
Configuration Function 50
Connecting to a Device 42
Custom Curve, Enable (RTT10) 94

D
Database Report
820 86
83 191
860 86
870ITCR 299
870ITEC 207
870ITPH 227
CFT10 161
CFT15 176
I/A Series Pressure 86
IMT10/IMT20 126
IMT25 145
IMT96 325
RTT10 99
RTT20 117
SRD991 253
Device Characteristic Info Window 26
Device Data Screen
130 262
140 262
820 71
83 179
860 71
870ITCR 285
870ITEC 193
870ITPH 213, 285
CFT10 147
CFT15 163

329
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Index

I/A Series Pressure 71

IMT10/IMT20 119
IMT25 129
IMT96 313
Non Foxboro Devices 305
RTT10 89
RTT20 101
SRD991 231
Device Selection 38
Device Status Screen,140 263
Device Toolbar 42, 45
Digital Output Function, Set 55
Downloading Database Information to a Device 48

E
Enhancements
Version 2.0 7
Version 2.2 8
Version 2.3 9
Error Messages
820 72
83 180
860 72
870ITCR 286
870ITEC 194
870ITPH 214
CFT10 148
CFT15 164
Device Diagnostic 66
Device Status 65
I/A Series Pressure 72
IFDC/PC20 65
IMT10/IMT20 120
IMT25 130
IMT96 314
RTT20 102
SRD991 233
Error Trace Info Window 28
Export 49

F
File Operations 38

H
Hardware Installation, PC20 13
Help Function 56

330
Index MI 020-495 – November 2002

I
I/A Series Pressure
Calibration 74
Configuration 82
Database Report 86
Device Data Screen 71
Error Messages 72
IFDC Trace Function 66
Import 49
IMT10/IMT20
Calibration 121
Configuration 124
Database Report 126
Device Data Screen 119
Error Messages 120
IMT25
Calibration 134
Configuration 138, 319
Database Report 145
Device Data Screen 129
Error Messages 130
IMT96
Calibration 315
Configuration 319
Database Report 325
Device Data Screen 313
Error Messages 314
Info Window 26

L
Local Function (SRD991) 240

M
mA/Pulse Output Function, Set 54
Message button 28

N
New Configuration Database, beginning a 37
Non Foxboro Devices
Configuration 306
Device Data Screen 305

O
Off-line Function 56
Off-line Function (SRD991) 239

331
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Index

On-line Function 56
On-line Function (SRD991) 239
Operation 19
Overview 1

P
Password/Security Options 31
PC20 Trace Function 66
Preconfiguring a Device 41
Previewing a Device Database Report 57
Printing a Device Database Report 57
Protection, Device Output 24

R
Raw Input Function, Display 55
Reading Device Data 48
Reboot Device (SRD991) 240
Reference Documents 9
ReRange 77
Reset Counters (SRD991) 240
Reset Status (SRD991) 240
Restore Default 79
Restore Factory Calibration, (RTT10) 95
Restore Factory mA (RTT10) 95
ReZero 75
RTT10
Calibration 90
Configuration 97
Database Report 99
Device Data Screen 89
RTT20
Calibration 103
Configuration 111
Database Report 117
Device Data Screen 101
Error Messages 102
Running IFDC/PC20 19

S
Set Setpoint (SRD991) 240
Set Update Time Function 54
Shortcut Toolbar 42
Software Installation, IFDC 17
Software Installation, PC20 17
Specification Information,140 282
SRD991

332
Index MI 020-495 – November 2002

Calibration 235
Configuration 241
Database Report 253
Device Data Screen 231
Error Messages 233
Test 239
Status Bar 25
Status Function, Field Device 52

T
Test (SRD991) 239
Toolbar 24
Top Level Menu Screen 29
Top Level Menu Screen, Device 42
Trace Function, IFDC 66
Trace Function, PC20 66
Trend Dialog 46

V
Version 2.0, software enhancements 7
Version 2.2, software enhancements 8
Version 2.3, software enhancements 9

W
Workshop Environment 46
Write Protect (SRD991) 240

333
MI 020-495 – November 2002 Index

ISSUE DATES
JAN 1999
MAR 2000
MAR 2001
JUN 2002
NOV 2002

Vertical lines to right of text or illustrations indicate areas changed at last issue date.

33 Commercial Street Invensys, Foxboro, FoxCom, FoxDoc, FoxView, and I/A Series are trademarks of Invensys plcs, its
Foxboro, MA 02035-2099 subsidiaries, and affiliates.
United States of America All other brand names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
www.foxboro.com
Inside U.S.: 1-866-PHON-IPS
1-866-746-6477
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 Copyright 1999-2002 Invensys Systems, Inc.
or contact your local Foxboro All rights reserved
representative.
Facsimile: 1-508-549-4999 MB 100 Printed in U.S.A. 1102